D at a Sh e e t , D S 3 , Ja n . 2 00 3 IWE8 Interworking Element for 8 E1/T1 Lines PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E, Version 3.4 Wired Communications N e v e r s t o p t h i n k i n g . Data Sheet Revision History: 2003-01-20 Previous Version: Preliminary Data Sheet, DS2, 2002-05-06 Page DS3 Subjects (major changes since last revision) ABM(R), ACE(R), AOP(R), ARCOFI(R), ASM(R), ASP(R), DigiTape(R), DuSLIC(R), EPIC(R), ELIC(R), FALC(R), GEMINAX(R), IDEC(R), INCA(R), IOM(R), IPAT(R)-2, ISAC(R), ITAC(R), IWE(R), IWORX(R), MUSAC(R), MuSLIC(R), OCTAT(R), OptiPort(R), POTSWIRE(R), QUAT(R), QuadFALC(R), SCOUT(R), SICAT(R), SICOFI(R), SIDEC(R), SLICOFI(R), SMINT(R), SOCRATES(R), VINETIC(R), 10BaseV(R), 10BaseVX(R) are registered trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG. 10BaseSTM, EasyPortTM, VDSLiteTM are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG. Microsoft(R) is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Linux(R) is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Edition 2003-01-20 Published by Infineon Technologies AG, St.-Martin-Strasse 53, 81669 Munchen, Germany (c) Infineon Technologies AG 2003. All Rights Reserved. Attention please! The information herein is given to describe certain components and shall not be considered as warranted characteristics. Terms of delivery and rights to technical change reserved. We hereby disclaim any and all warranties, including but not limited to warranties of non-infringement, regarding circuits, descriptions and charts stated herein. Infineon Technologies is an approved CECC manufacturer. Information For further information on technology, delivery terms and conditions and prices please contact your nearest Infineon Technologies Office in Germany or our Infineon Technologies Representatives worldwide (www.infineon.com). Warnings Due to technical requirements components may contain dangerous substances. For information on the types in question please contact your nearest Infineon Technologies Office. Infineon Technologies Components may only be used in life-support devices or systems with the express written approval of Infineon Technologies, if a failure of such components can reasonably be expected to cause the failure of that life-support device or system, or to affect the safety or effectiveness of that device or system. Life support devices or systems are intended to be implanted in the human body, or to support and/or maintain and sustain and/or protect human life. If they fail, it is reasonable to assume that the health of the user or other persons may be endangered. IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Table of Contents Page 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.4 1.5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Echo Canceller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences Between PXB4220 And PXB4219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences Between PXB4220 And PXB4221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 15 17 18 19 19 21 21 2 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 Pin Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Definitions and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Framer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTOPIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Recovery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External RAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Connected Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 22 23 23 25 27 28 28 30 31 32 33 33 3 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.2 3.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unstructured CES Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structured CES Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 35 35 35 35 36 37 38 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.1.1 4.1.1.2 4.1.1.3 4.1.1.4 4.1.1.5 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.1.1 Operational Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Transmit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Transmit Buffer Filling Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Discarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell rate de-coupling: Idle/Unassigned Cell Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Payload Scrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEC Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of ATM Transmit Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Receive Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Delineation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 42 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 46 46 46 Data Sheet 3 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Table of Contents Page 4.2.1.2 HEC Check: Header Error Detection and Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.3 Cell Payload Descrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.4 Idle, Physical Layer or Unassigned Cell Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Setup of ATM Receive Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 AAL Segmentation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.1 Segmentation Port Decorrelation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.2 Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.3 Transport of the Framer Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.4 Transport of CAS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.5 CAS Conditioning and Freezing Upstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.6 Segmentation Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.7 Padding Partially Filled Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Setup of AAL Segmentation Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 AAL Reassembly Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.1 Port and Channel Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.2 Sequence Number Protection field check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.3 Sequence Number field check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.4 RTS Extraction and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.5 Pointer Field Detection and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.6 CAS Conditioning and Freezing Downstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.7 Insertion of Dummy Cells at Cell Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.8 Reassembly Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.9 Handling of Reassembly Buffer Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.10 Handling of Reassembly Buffer Underflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.11 Synchronization of SDT Structure with Port Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.1 Setup of Reassembly Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.2 Physical Reassembly Buffer Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.3 Initialization of the Reassembly Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.4 Re-Initialization of the Reassembly Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Internal Clock Recovery Circuit (ICRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Frame Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Frame Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 RTS Receive FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.5 RTS Transmit FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.6 ICRC Loopback Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.7 RTS Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.8 Fractional Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.9 Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sheet 4 48 49 49 51 52 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 60 60 60 61 61 62 62 62 63 64 69 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 73 74 74 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Table of Contents Page 4.5.10 4.5.11 4.5.11.1 4.5.11.2 4.5.11.3 4.5.11.4 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.2.1 4.11.2.2 4.11.2.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLL Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLL-SRTS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLL-FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLL-ACM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS with ACM: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OAM Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loopback Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upstream Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downstream Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping of Channels to Timeslots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unstructured CES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structured CES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structured CES with CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.1.1 5.1.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.2 5.1.3 5.1.3.1 5.1.3.2 5.1.4 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 Interface Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Generic Framer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 FALC Mode (FAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 T1 FALC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 E1 FALC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Generic Interface Mode (GIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Synchronous Modes (SYM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Synchronous Mode at 2.048 MHz (SYM2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Synchronous Mode at 8.192 MHz (SYM8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Echo Canceller Mode (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 UTOPIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Port Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Back Pressure/ATM Cell Discarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 General Backpressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Port Specific Backpressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Sideband Signals of the UTOPIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Data Sheet 5 74 74 74 75 75 78 79 79 79 79 80 81 81 81 82 83 84 85 85 86 86 87 88 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Table of Contents Page 5.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.6 5.7 5.8 Clock Recovery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microprocessor Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External RAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Scan Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 112 112 113 115 117 118 6 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 6.1.1.3 6.1.1.4 6.1.1.5 6.1.2 6.1.2.1 6.1.2.2 6.1.2.3 6.1.2.4 6.1.2.5 6.1.3 6.1.3.1 6.1.4 6.1.4.1 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.7.1 6.2.7.2 6.2.8 Memory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Configuration RAM's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: Receive Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: ATM Receive Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: ATM Receive Continuation Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: AAL Receive Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: AAL Receive Continuation Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: ATM or AAL Receive Idle Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: Transmit Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: ATM Transmit Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: ATM Transmit Continuation Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: AAL Transmit Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: AAL Transmit Continuation Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: ATM or AAL Transmit Idle Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM3: Transmit Port Configuration Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM3: AAL Transmit Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM4: Transmit Port Configuration Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM4: AAL Transmit Conditioning Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistics Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistics Counter thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Insertion Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Extraction Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segmentation/ATM Receive Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Receive Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segmentation Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly/ATM Transmit Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 120 121 121 122 123 126 127 127 127 128 129 132 133 134 134 135 136 137 137 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 146 146 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Configuration Registers (pcfN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC Configuration Register (acfg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OAM Control Register (oamc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OAM-Counter Enable Register for ATM Ports (catm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 151 154 156 157 Data Sheet 6 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Table of Contents 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.22 7.23 7.24 7.25 7.26 7.27 7.28 7.29 7.30 7.31 7.32 7.33 7.34 7.35 7.36 7.37 7.38 7.39 7.40 7.41 7.42 7.43 7.44 7.45 7.46 Page OAM-Counter Enable Register for AAL Ports (caal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Byte-Pattern Register bp3 and bp2 (bp32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Byte-Pattern Register bp1 and bp0 (bp10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Control Register (atmc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (rxid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (txid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loopback Control Register (lpbc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Fill Register for Partially Filled Cells (cfil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Mask Register 1 (imr1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer Enable Register (time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Delineation FSM Status Register (cdfs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version Register (vers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Monitor Register (ckmo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Status Register 1 (isr1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 1 Register (eis1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 2 Register (eis2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 3 Register (eis3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 4 Register (eis4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Status Register 2 (isr2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Mode Register (opmo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FT Clock Select Register (ftcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter VCI Pattern 1 Register (cfvp1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter VCI Mask 1 Register (cfvm1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter VCI Pattern 2 Register (cfvp2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter VCI Mask 2 Register (cfvm2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter Payload Type Register (cfpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Register (cmd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter Read Pointer Register (cfrp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register (thrshld) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTOPIA Configuration Register (utconf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAS 1 Register (cas1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAS 2 Register (cas2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAS 3 Register (cas3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register for Ports 0 and 1 (thrsp01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register for Ports 2 and 3 (thrsp23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register for Ports 4 and 5 (thrsp45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register for Ports 6 and 7 (thrsp67) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 0 Register (eis0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD Timer Register (lcdtimer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Source Register (irs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Mask (irm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Clock Recovery Circuit Configuration Register (icrcconf) . . . . . . Data Sheet 7 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 173 174 175 176 177 178 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Table of Contents Page 7.47 7.48 7.49 7.50 7.51 7.52 7.53 7.54 7.55 7.56 7.57 7.58 7.59 7.60 7.61 7.62 7.63 7.64 7.65 7.66 7.67 Configuration Register Downstream of Port N (condN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Source of Port N (irsN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Mask of Port N (irmN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Input of Port N (tsinN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Register Upstream Direction of Port N (conuN) . . . . . . . . Average Buffer Filling of Port N (avbN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Shift Factor of Port N (asfN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time of Initial Free Run of Port N (tiniN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Out of Lock Detection of Port N (tresh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICRC Parity Errors at Clock Recovery Interface (per) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICRC Synchronization Errors at Clock Recovery Interface (scri) . . . . . . ICRC Clock Recovery Interface FIFO Overflow (crifo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICRC Version Register (icrcv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Receive FIFO Underflow of Port N (sruN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Receive FIFO Overflow of Port N (sroN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Generator Reset of Port N (srrN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Invalid Value Processed of Port N (sriN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Data Too Late of Port N (atlN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Out Of Lock Register of Port N (oolN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Register of Port N (statN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Output Register of Port N (tsoutN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 Application Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translating AAL Statistics Counters into the ATMF CES Version 2 MIB . Jitter Characteristics of the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 226 228 230 230 231 233 234 236 237 239 240 9 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.6.1 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal Package Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacitances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock and Reset Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 242 243 244 245 246 247 247 Data Sheet 8 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Table of Contents 9.6.2 9.6.2.1 9.6.2.2 9.6.2.3 9.6.2.4 9.6.3 9.6.4 9.6.5 9.6.6 9.6.6.1 9.6.6.2 9.6.7 9.6.8 Page Framer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface in SYM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface in EC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTOPIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Recovery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary-Scan Test Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 248 251 254 256 256 260 261 262 262 264 265 267 10 10.1 10.2 10.3 Testmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Identification Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruction Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary-Scan Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 268 268 268 11 Package Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 12 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Adaptation Layer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Clock Method ACM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Associated Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Contacts for SRTS Patent Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 14 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 15 Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Data Sheet 9 274 274 278 280 281 281 282 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E List of Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Data Sheet Page Logic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Typical IWE8 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Line Card for 8 T1/E1 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Echo Canceller Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Cell delineation state diagram (Figure 5/I.432.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Maintenance state transitions for cell delineation (Figure 2/ I.432.3). . 47 HEC: Receiver mode of Operation (Figure 3/ITU I.432.1) . . . . . . . . . . 48 HEC Detection According to ATM Forum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Pre-assigned cell header values at the UNI (Table 1/I.361) . . . . . . . . 50 Pre-defined header field values [11] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 SAR-PDU of AAL Type 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Synchronization of SRTS Generation with the Start of Segmentation . 57 Reassembly Buffer Initialization: No CDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Reassembly Buffer Initialization: positive CDV at Start Up . . . . . . . . . 65 Reassembly Buffer Initialization: Negative CDV at Start Up . . . . . . . . 66 Reassembly Buffer Initialization for SDT: positive CDV at Start Up. . . 67 Block Diagram of the ICRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Transient Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Influence of Damping on Lock in Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Connection of IWE8 to QuadFALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Framer Interface in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Framer Interface in GIM T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Framer Interface in GIM E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Framer Interface in SYM2 E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Framer Interface in SYM8 E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Framer Interface in EC Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 UTOPIA Receive and Transmit Interfaces in Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . 105 Utopia Sideband Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 IMA Interface Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Connection of IWE8 to an Intel Type Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Connection of IWE8 to an Motorola Type Microprocessor . . . . . . . . 114 External RAM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 RAM Interface Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Memory Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Structure of the IWE8 external RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Clock Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . 230 ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . 231 ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . 232 ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . 232 10 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E List of Figures Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Data Sheet Page SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . Input/Output Waveforms for AC Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock and Reset Interface Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Receive Interface Timing in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Transmit Interface Timing in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface Timing for SYM 2.048 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface Timing in SYM 8.192 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface Timing in EC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup and hold time definition (single- and multi PHY) . . . . . . . . . . . Tri-state timing (multi-PHY, multiple devices only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing of the IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Recovery Interface Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Mode Write Cycle Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Mode Read Cycle Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola Mode Timing Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Interface Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary-Scan Test Interface Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Package Outline: P-BGA-256 (Plastic Metric Quad Flat Package) Structure of the AAL1 SAR-PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Informative and Example Algorithm State Machine (Fig. III.2/I.363.1) The Concept of SRTS (Fig. 5/I.363.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generation of Residual Time Stamp (RTS) (Fig.6/ I.363.1) . . . . . . . . Example Multiframe Structure for 3x64 kbit/s E1 with CAS . . . . . . . . Example Multiframe Structure for 1x64 kbit/s DS1 with CAS. . . . . . . 11 233 234 235 235 236 237 238 238 239 240 241 241 247 247 248 250 251 252 254 255 256 257 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 267 273 274 276 278 279 282 283 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Data Sheet Page Generic Framer Interface (73 pins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 UTOPIA Interface (36 pins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Clock Recovery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 External RAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Test Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Not Connected Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Functions of IWE8 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 ATM Cell Discarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Activation sequence for ATM transmit ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Activation sequence for ATM receive ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Definition of the CAS Signalling Conditioning Nibbles. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Relationship betw. Cell Filling & Segmentation Buffer Subblock Size . 55 Cell Filling level values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Activation sequence for AAL segmentation channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Activation sequence for AAL reassembly channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Relationship betw. Cell Filling and Reassembly Buffer Subblock Size 63 Coding of Slot Type in internal configuration RAMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 RAM slot positions for ITU-T G.804 compliant ATM mapping . . . . . . . 85 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES in AAL mode . . . . . . . . . . . 87 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES with CAS in AAL mode . . . 89 Time slot Mapping in T1 Translation Mode 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 F-Channel Format in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Clock Recovery Interface frame format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Configuration of the Microprocessor Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Master Clock Frequency Depending on Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Statistics Counters for ATM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Statistics Counters for AAL Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Internal Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Clock and Reset Interface AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Framer Receive Interface Timing in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Framer Transmit Interface Timing in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Framer Interface AC Timing Characteristics in SYM2 Mode . . . . . . . 254 Framer Interface Timing in SYM8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Framer Interface Timing in EC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Transmit Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Single PHY) . . . . . . . . . . 258 12 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E List of Tables Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Data Sheet Page Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Single PHY) . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Multi-PHY) . . . . . . . . . . . Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Multi-PHY) . . . . . . . . . . . . IMA Interface AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Recovery Interface AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Mode Write Cycle AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Mode Read Cycle AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola Mode AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Interface AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary-Scan Test Interface AC Timing Characteristics. . . . . . . . . Boundary Scan Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bit allocation of E1 time slot 16 for CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allocation of CAS Bits to 24 Frame Multiframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 258 259 259 261 261 262 263 264 266 267 268 281 283 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Overview 1 Overview The Interworking Element for 8 E1/T1 Lines PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E (IWE8) is a member of Infineon's ATM chip set. Together with framing and line interface components (e.g. Infineon's QuadFALC PEB 22554) the IWE8 serves as gateway between Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) networks and timeslot based PDH networks. Each of the 8 E1 or T1 input and output ports can be configured independently to operate in one of two basic modes: ATM Mode ATM mode ports operate as an ATM User Network Interface (UNI) at 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1). The device supports mapping of ATM cells in T1/E1 frames according to ITU-T G.804, "ATM Cell Mapping into Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH)" [26] and ATM Forum, "ATM on Fractional E1/T1" [9]. It implements all Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer functions of the Physical Layer (PHY) defined in ITU-T I.432, "B-ISDN User-network Interface - Physical layer Specification" [32] AAL Mode AAL mode ports operate as an ATM Circuit Emulation Service Interworking Function (CES-IWF) between Constant Bit Rate (CBR) equipment and an ATM network as described by the ATM Forum, "Circuit Emulation Services Version 2.0" [10]. (only PXB 4220/4221) The CBR circuits are converted into ATM constant bit-rate virtual channels using the ATM Adaptation Layer type 1 (AAL1) as defined in I.363.1, "B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer Specification, Types 1 and 2" [31] or without any ATM Adaptation Layer overhead, which will be referred as AAL type 0 throughout the rest of this document. The IWE8 provides the segmentation and reassembly function. Both the "Unstructured DS1/E1 Service" and the "Structured DS1/E1 N x 64 kbit/s Basic Service" as described in the "Circuit Emulation Services Version 2.0" by the ATM Forum in [10] are supported. For simplicity reasons the shorthand notation "Unstructured CES" will be used to identify the "Unstructured DS1/E1 Service" while the "Structured DS1/E1 N x 64 kbit/s Service" will be referred to as "Structured CES" throughout the rest of this document. Data Sheet 14 2003-01-20 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interworking Element for 8 E1/T1 Lines IWE8 Version 3.4 1.1 Features * Full duplex ATM Packetizer/Depacketizer for 8 E1/T1 highways * Configurable to T1 or E1 mode via external pin * 8 T1/E1 ports configurable independently to ATM or AAL Mode * ATM Mode (PXB 4219/4220/4221): P-BGA-256-2 - ATM cell mapping into PDH according to ITUT G.804 [26] - B-ISDN User-Network interface - Physical Layer according to ITU-T I.432 [32] - B-ISDN User-Network interface - Physical Layer operation at 1544 KBit/s and 2048 KBit/s according to ITU-T I.432.3 [34] * AAL Mode (PXB 4220/4221): - AAL1 according to ITU-T I.363.1 [31] or transparent without any adaptation layer overhead (AAL0) - T1/E1 unstructured service according to ATM Forum af-vtoa-0078.000 [10] section 3 - Structured T1/E1 N x 64 kbit/s service according to [10] section 2 with M channels of N x 64 kbit/s (M,N = 1to 24 for T1) (M,N = 1to 32 for E1) - Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) support according to [10] - Echo Canceller Mode - Partially filled cells with programmable filling thresholds - Selectable Sequence Count Algorithm: - Robust/Fast according to ITU-T I.363.1 [30] - According to ETSI (prl-ETS 300353 annex D) [17] - Fast: Saves 6 ms during reassembly for 1 x 64 kbit/s connection - AAL0 option: 48 Bytes user payload per ATM Cell, without AAL overhead - Reassembly buffer can compensate up to +/- 4 ms Cell Delay Variation (CDV) - Statistics counters per channel for lost/misinserted/errored cells etc. Type Package PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E P-BGA-256 Data Sheet 15 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Overview * * * * * * * * * * * - Internal clock recovery circuit using Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS, for fully filled cells only) or Adaptive Clock Method (ACM) for unstructured CES ports. For SRTS a patent fee needs to be paid. Optionally, it's possible to order the PXB 4221 device, which comes without SRTS clock recovery. - Trunk freezing and conditioning according to Bellcore TR-NWT-000170 [14] IMA interface: - Programmable threshold between read and write pointer of Mapping Buffer - Output Signal for buffer threshold crossing - Output Signal for discarded cell - Output pins for port number indication 8 generic framer interfaces with integrated transmit clock selector supporting - Synchronous Mode (SYM) for E1 - Generic Interface Mode (GIM) - FALC Mode (FAM): Glue-less interface for Infineon's Framer and Line Interface Components (FALC) - Echo Canceller Mode (EC): ATM cells are duplicated internally and transmitted via two framer ports UTOPIA industry standard interface: - Level 2 in slave mode; 8 data, 5 address lines - Level 1 in master/slave mode - UTOPIA clock up to 38.88 MHz 16-bit generic microprocessor interface for control and configuration of the chip runs either in Intel 386EX or Motorola compatible mode External synchronous Flow-Through SSRAM 1 x 64k x 33 bit or 1 x 64k x 32 bit required Build-in data path loops for test Cell insertion/extraction via microprocessor interface 3.3 Volt power supply with 5 Volt tolerant inputs Typical power dissipation 1 Watt P-BGA-256 package Temperature range from -40 to +85C Data Sheet 16 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Overview Logic Symbol RXDAT[0:7] MPCS RXPTY MPWR RXSOC MPRD RXCLAV MPRDY RXENB PXB 4219 PXB 4220 PXB 4221 MPIR1,2 RMADR[0:15] TXCLK TXDAT[0:7] TXPTY RMCS TXSOC RMOE TXCLAV RMWR Data Sheet PN2 PN0 UNCHEC ATBTC FTMFS[0:7] FTFRS[0:7] FTCKO[0:7] FRMFB[0:7] FRFRS[0:7] FRDAT[0:7] FRCLK[0:7] FRLOS[0:7] FTDAT[0:7] IMA Interface Framer Interface Figure 1 PN1 TXENB RMCLK RMADC UTOPIA Interface (Level 2) TXADR[0:4] RMDAT[0:32] RAM Interface RXCLK RXADR[0:4] MPADR[0:17] Microprocessor Interface TDO TDI TMS TCK TRST OUTTR MPDATA[0:15] UTTR Test Interface SDI SDOD SSP SDOR SCLK CR Interface ITST[0:3] 1.2 ILS2 Logic Symbol 17 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Overview 1.3 Typical Applications Figure 2 illustrates three typical application areas which utilize the IWE8 chip in Line Interface Cards (LICs) or Network Interface Controllers (NICs). Application 1 utilizes the IWE8 as an internetworking device for communication between a narrowband Time-Slot based network and an ATM network. Application 2 utilizes the IWE8 chip to enable the use of an existing T1/E1 access line for connection to an ATM network. In application 3, the IWE8 chip enables terminals using a Leased Line or Time-Slot based service to convert from T1/E1 network connection to ATM network connection without noticeable changes to the subscriber. Application 1 PBX 0 DS1/E1 Links IWETM PBX 8 7 DS1/E1 Links Structured Circuit Emulation Service for DS1/E1 (Nx64kbit/s with/without partially filled cells) over ATM ATM Links Application 2 Multiservice Switch 0 IWETM 8 7 ATM Network NNI/UNI 2.048 Mbps, NNI/UNI 1.544 Mbps (I.432.2, G.804) ATM Links Application 3 PBX 0 DS1/E1 Links IWETM 8 PBX 7 DS1/E1 Links Unstructured Circuit Emulation Service for DS1/E1 (with/ without partially filled cells) for Leased Lines over ATM Tia Figure 2 Typical IWE8 Applications The PXB 4220 IWE8 chip is designed to handle up to eight T1/E1 ports. It transfers data between the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)-highway and an UTOPIA ATM Interface. Data Sheet 18 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Overview 1.3.1 Line Card Figure 3 shows an example Line Interface Card (LIC) utilizing the IWE8 in a switch environment. Two Infineon Quad Framer and Line Interface Component (QuadFALC, PEB 22554) chips are connected at the PCM ports. An ATM Layer circuit is connected at the UTOPIA Interface port and could be implemented using Infineon PXB 4350 ATM Layer Processor (ALP) chip. T1/E1 Lines Serial Interface UTOPIA Interface Switching Network FT SSRAM 64 K x 36 Bit Mag. QuadFALC PEB 22554 ATM Layer Circuit e.g. ALP PXB 4350 IWE8 Mag. Clock Supply Clock = 25 MHz QuadFALC PEB 22554 Lcf8tc Figure 3 Line Card for 8 T1/E1 Channels External synchronous SRAM is always required for proper IWE8 operation. The IWE8 requires only one main operating clock of 12 times the data rate of one port. An emergency clock of 32.768 MHz is optional. The Framer and Utopia interface clocks can be completely asynchronous with respect to the main clock. A microprocessor controls and operates the IWE8 via a generic 16-bit interface. 1.3.2 Echo Canceller In communication links reflections resulting in an electrical echo are due to hybrid splits or imperfect terminations in subscriber loops. Acoustical echoes may occur due to poor isolation of microphone and speaker of some telephone systems. These electrical and acoustical echoes disturb the quality of the transmission. To ensure high quality, pure data transmission the ITU-T suggests in the recommendation G.131 [22] the use of echo cancellers. Echo cancellation is extremely desirable for data links with total round trip transmission times of more than 50 ms. Data Sheet 19 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Overview IWU PDH network FALC LH PEB2255 SIDEC PEB20954 Near End Figure 4 IWE8 PXB4220 ATM network Far End Echo Canceller Application The echo cancelling function itself is performed in STM. In the application above the IWE8 is used to translate voice ATM channels into STM channels and vice versa. Infineon's Smart Integrated Digital Echo Canceller (SIDEC, PEB 20954) is used for cancellation of the echo that is generated by reflection on the near end side and heard by the far end speaker. The SIDEC can cancel end echo paths (SDH or PDH network on near end side) up to 128 ms. For details see [21] Data Sheet 20 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Overview 1.4 Differences Between PXB4220 And PXB4219 The IWE8 type PXB 4219 does only support the ATM mode used for ITU-T G.804 compliant ATM cell mapping into the plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) at line rates of 1544 kbit/s and 2048 kbit/s. The AAL mode is not available. 1.5 Differences Between PXB4220 And PXB4221 The IWE8 type PXB 4220 uses an internal clock recovery mechanism (SRTS) which is patented by Bellcore. SRTS is supported for fully filled cells only. Related Patents are: * Bellcore patent No. 5,260,978 (Synchronous Residual Time Stamp for Timing Recovery in a broadband network) * Bellcore patent No. 4,839,306 (Method and apparatus for multiplexing circuit and packet traffic) Infineon Technologies is not allowed to collect SRTS license fees on the IWE8 on behalf of Bellcore. Contacts for license issues are given in Chapter 13. Every IWE8 customer must get in contact with Bellcore legal department by himself to clarify whether his application needs to license the SRTS functionality. For customers who do not want to use the built-in SRTS mechanism, Infineon provides a special version of the IWE8. The name of this device is PXB 4221 and covers the same functionality (pin and register compatible) like the PXB 4220. SRTS is physically and permanently disabled, so that no patent fees have to be paid. Data Sheet 21 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions 2 Pin Descriptions 2.1 Pin Diagram A B C E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y MPDAT MPDAT MPDAT MPDAT MPDAT MPADRMPADRMPADRMPADRMPADRMPADR TXADR RFCLK PN0 E1T1 _2 _5 _8 _12 _15 _1 _4 _6 _9 _13 _16 _1 1 2 FTMFS FTDAT FTCKO MPDAT MPDAT MPDAT MPDAT MPDAT MPADRMPADRMPADRMPADRMPADR TXADR TXADR TDO MPCS CLOCK MPIR1 CLK52 _7 _7 _5 _1 _4 _7 _11 _13 _2 _5 _8 _12 _15 _0 _3 2 3 FRMFB FRFRS FTFRS N.C. _7 _7 _7 TXADR RXADR _2 _2 3 4 FRLOS FRDAT FTCKO GND _7 _7 _7 MPDAT MPDAT MPADR MPADR MPADR RXADR TXADR RXADR GND VDD MPRDY GND VDD GND _0 _9 _0 _10 _17 _0 _4 _3 4 5 FRFRS FTFRS FRCLK FTCKO _6 _6 _7 _6 6 FRCLK FRMFB FTMFS VDD _6 _6 _6 VDD TXCLA TXDAT TXSOC V _0 6 7 FTFRS FRLOS FRDAT FTDAT _5 _6 _6 _6 TXENB TXDAT TXDAT TXDAT _1 _2 _3 7 8 FRFRS FTDAT FTMFS GND _5 _5 _5 GND TXDAT TXDAT TXDAT _4 _5 _6 8 9 FRLOS FRCLK FRDAT FRMFB _5 _5 _5 _5 TXDAT TXPTY UTTR TXCLK _7 9 10 FRFRS FTDAT FTMFS FTFRS _4 _4 _4 _4 11 TSCSH 12 1 GND FTCKO TCK _4 D TMS MPWR TRST MPRD TDI VDD MPDAT MPDAT MPDAT MPDAT MPADRMPADRMPADRMPADR RESET MPIR2 EC _3 _6 _10 _14 _3 _7 _11 _14 TSCEN RXADR RXADR PN1 _1 _4 PN2 5 RXCLA RXSOC ATBTC V 10 RXDAT RXDAT RXDAT RXDAT _3 _2 _1 _0 11 FRCLK FRLOS FTFRS FTMFS _4 _4 _3 _3 RXDAT RXDAT RXDAT RXDAT _7 _6 _5 _4 12 13 FRDAT FRFRS FTCKO GND _3 _3 _3 GND RXCLK RXENB RXPTY 13 14 FRMFB FRDAT FRCLK FTMFS _3 _3 _3 _2 RMDAT RMDAT RMCLK OUTTR _3 _0 14 15 FRLOS FTFRS FTDAT VDD _3 _2 _2 16 FRFRS FTCKO FRMFB FRLOS _2 _2 _2 _2 17 FRDAT FTMFS FTFRS FTFRS FRCLK RMADRRMADR RMDAT RMDAT GND VDD GND VDD GND VDD _2 _1 _1 _0 _0 _7 _3 _31 _22 18 FRCLK FTDAT FRMFB FRLOS FRFRS FRDAT RMADRRMADRRMADRRMADR RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMADC TBUS SDI _2 _1 _1 _1 _0 _0 _14 _10 _6 _2 _32 _28 _25 _21 _19 _16 _11 18 19 FRFRS FRCLK FTDAT FRMFB RMADRRMADRRMADRRMADRRMADR RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT N.C. RMOE RMWR _1 _1 _0 _0 _15 _12 _9 _5 _1 _29 _26 _23 _20 _15 _14 _13 _12 19 20 FTCKO FRDAT FTMFS FTCKO FRLOS RMADRRMADRRMADRRMADRRMADRUNCHE RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMCS SCLK SDOR SDOD _1 _1 _0 _0 _0 _13 _11 _8 _4 _0 C _30 _27 _24 _18 _17 20 VDD FRDAT FRMFB VDD _4 _4 A B C D VDD E F G H J K L M N P R SSP T RMDAT RMDAT PMT _4 _1 15 RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT _9 _7 _5 _2 16 RMDAT RMDAT RMDAT _10 _8 _6 17 GND U V W Y Ball Layout Bottom View Figure 5 Data Sheet Pin Configuration 22 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions 2.2 Pin Definitions and Functions Output Pull Up and Pull Down Type Definitions PUx Pull Up of strength x (x = A, B) is implemented. The corresponding current is specified in Chapter 9.4 PDx Pull Down of strength x (x = A) is implemented. The corresponding current is specified in Chapter 9.4 Tri Tri-stated when inactive 2.2.1 Table 1 Pin No. Generic Framer Interface Generic Framer Interface (73 pins) Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) C5, A6, B9, FRCLK[7:0] A12, C14, A18, C19, G17 I Framer Receive Clock Receive clock for the framer interface B4, C7, C9, FRDAT[7:0] B11, B14, A17, B20, F18 I PDA Framer Receive Data Receive data input of the framer interface A3, B6, D9, FRMFB[7:0] C11, A14, C16, C18, E19 I PUA Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Indication that a new multi-/superframe is available on the receive side of the framer interface B3, A5, A8, FRFRS[7:0] A10, B13, A16, A19, E18 O PUA Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Indication that a new frame is available on the receive side of the framer interface A4,B7, A9, B12, A15, D16, D18, E20 I PDA Framer Receive Loss of Signalling Indication that CAS bits are invalid, IWE8 will start CAS freezing Data Sheet FRLOS[7:0] 23 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions Table 1 Pin No. Generic Framer Interface (73 pins) (cont'd) Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) C4, D5, C2, FTCKO[7:0] B1, C13, B16, A20, D20 O/I PDA Framer Transmit Clock Transmit clock for the framer interface. * Recovered clock output from the ICRC * Framer receive clock output from pin FRCLKN * Output of the clock derived from RFCLK * Input for an external clock recovery device B2, D7, B8, FTDAT[7:0] B10, A13, C15, B18, D19 O PUA Framer Transmit Data Transmit data output of the framer interface A2, C6, C8, FTMFS[7:0] C10, D12, D14, B17, C20 O PUA Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Indication that a new multi-/superframe is available on the transmit side of the framer interface C3, B5, A7, FTFRS[7:0] D10, C12, B15, C17, E17 O PUA Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse Indication that a new frame is available on the transmit side of the framer interface L1 I Reference Clock SYM and EC mode: Central framer interface clock for all framer ports FAM and GIM: Optional SRTS/ACM reference or emergency clock for the framer receive interface in case of clock failure Data Sheet RFCLK 24 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions 2.2.2 Table 2 UTOPIA Interface UTOPIA Interface (36 pins) Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) U12, V12, W12, Y12, U11, V11, W11, Y11 RXDAT[7:0] O PUA UTOPIA Receive Data Bus Byte-wide data driven from PHY to ATM layer. RxData[7] is the MSB. Y13 RXPTY O PUA UTOPIA Receive Odd Parity Bit Odd parity for RXDAT[0:7] driven by the PHY layer. W10 RXSOC O PDA UTOPIA Receive Start-of-Cell Active high signal asserted by the PHY layer when RXDAT[0:7] contains the first valid byte of a cell. V10 RXCLAV Slave: O Master: I PDA UTOPIA Receive Cell Available Slave: RXCLAV is an active high signal asserted by the PHY layer to indicate that it has data available for transfer to the ATM layer. Master: RXCLAV is an active high signal asserted by the ATM layer to indicate that it has data available for transfer to the PHY layer. V13 RXCLK I UTOPIA Receive Clock Transfer/synchronization clock from the ATM layer to the PHY layer for synchronizing transfers on RXDAT[0:7]. W13 RXENB Slave: I Master: O PUA UTOPIA Receive Enable Slave: Active low signal asserted by the ATM layer to indicate that RXDAT[0:7] and RXSOC will be sampled at the end of the next cycle. Master: Active low signal asserted by the PHY layer to indicate that RXDAT[0:7] and RXSOC will be sampled at the end of the next cycle. Data Sheet 25 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions Table 2 Pin No. UTOPIA Interface (36 pins) (cont'd) Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) V5, Y4, Y3, RXADR[4:0] U5, V4 I PUA UTOPIA Receive Address Bus Five bit wide true data driven from the ATM to MPHY layer to select the appropriate MPHY device. RXADR[4] is the MSB. U9, Y8, W8, V8, Y7, W7, V7, Y6 TXDAT[7:0] I PUA UTOPIA Transmit Data Bus Byte-wide true data driven from ATM to PHY layer. TXDAT[7] is the MSB. V9 TXPTY I PUA UTOPIA Transmit Odd Parity Bit TXPTY is the odd parity bit over TXDAT[0:7] driven by the ATM layer. W6 TXSOC I PDA UTOPIA Transmit Start-of-Cell Active high signal asserted by the ATM layer when TXDAT[0:7] contains the first valid byte of the cell. V6 TXCLAV Slave: O Master: I PDA UTOPIA Transmit Cell Available Slave: TXCLAV is an active high signal asserted by the PHY layer to indicate it can accept data. Master: TXCLAV is an active high signal asserted by the ATM layer to indicate it can accept data. Y9 TXCLK I UTOPIA Transmit Clock Data transfer/synchronization clock provided by the ATM layer to the PHY layer for synchronizing transfers on TXDAT[0:7]. Data Sheet 26 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions Table 2 UTOPIA Interface (36 pins) (cont'd) Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) U7 TXENB Slave: I Master: O PUA W4, Y2, W3, Y1, W2 2.2.3 Table 3 TXADR[4:0] UTOPIA Transmit Enable Slave: Active low signal asserted by the ATM layer during cycles when TXDAT[0:7] contains valid cell data. Master: Active low signal asserted by the PHY layer during cycles when TXDAT[0:7] contains valid cell data. I PUA UTOPIA Transmit Address Bus Five bit wide true data driven from the ATM to MPHY layer to poll and select the appropriate MPHY device. TXADR4 is the MSB. IMA Interface IMA Interface Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Output (O) Function Y10 ATBTC O Tri ATM Transmit Buffer Threshold Crossing Indicates if the difference between the write and read pointer of the mapping buffer became smaller than a SW selectable threshold L20 UNCHEC O Tri Uncorrectable HEC Error Indicates if a cell has been discarded due to an uncorrectable HEC error Y5, W5, M1 PN[2:0] O Tri Port Number Indicates the port number where the cell causing ATBT or UNCHEC being asserted came from Data Sheet 27 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions 2.2.4 Table 4 Clock Recovery Interface Clock Recovery Interface Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) Y18 SDI I Serial Data Input Clock recovery frame input. Y20 SDOD O Tri Serial Data Output Data Clock recovery frame output W20 SDOR O Tri Serial Data Output Reset Clock recovery reset frame output T17 SSP O Tri Serial Synchronization Pulse Frame synchronization pulse output T20 SCLK O Tri Serial Clock Clock output of the clock recovery interface. Runs at the same frequency than the CLOCK input 2.2.5 Table 5 Pin No. Microprocessor Interface Microprocessor Interface Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) K1, K3, K2, MPDAT[15:0] J1, J2, J3, J4, H1, H2, H3, G1, G2, G3, F1, F2, G4 I/O PUA Microprocessor Data Bus This bidirectional three-state bus provides the general-purpose data path between the IWE8 and an external master. The bus uses little endian word order. MPDAT15 is the MSB. T4, V1, U2, MPADR[17:0] T3, U1, T2, R3, P4, T1, R2, P3, R1, P2, P1, N3, N2, N1, M4 I Microprocessor Address Bus Provides the address of the current bus cycle. Addresses are 16-bit aligned. MPADR17 is the MSB of the bus E2 I Microprocessor Chip Select This signal is driven by the bus master to indicate a read or write access. Data Sheet MPCS 28 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions Table 5 Microprocessor Interface (cont'd) Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) E1 MPWR/ MPRW I Microprocessor Write Enable (Intel Bus Mode) This signal is driven by the bus master to indicate a write data transfer Read/Write Enable (Motorola Bus Mode) This three-state signal is driven by the bus master to indicate the direction of the bus's data transfer F3 MPRD/ MPTS I Microprocessor Read Enable (Intel Bus Mode) This signal is driven by the bus master to indicate a read data transfer Microprocessor Transfer Start (Motorola Bus Mode) This signal is asserted by the bus master to indicate the start of a bus cycle that transfers data to or from the device L4 MPRDY MPTA O Tri Microprocessor Ready (Intel Bus Mode) This three-state output indicates that the device has accepted date from the master (write) or has driven the data bus with valid data (read) Microprocessor Transfer Acknowledge (Motorola Bus Mode) This three-state output indicates that the device has accepted date from the master (write) or has driven the data bus with valid data (read) M2 MPIR1 O PUB Microprocessor Interrupt Request 1 Main interrupt pin indicating a special event in the IWE8. M3 MPIR2 O PUB Microprocessor Interrupt Request 2 This signal is generated by timer set 2 to indicate that a counter expired Data Sheet 29 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions 2.2.6 Table 6 External RAM Interface External RAM Interface Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) F19, G18, F20, G19, G20, H18, H19, H20, J17, J18, J19, J20, K17, K18, K19, K20 RMADR[15:0] O Tri RAM Address Bus This bus provides the address of the current bus cycle. RMADR15 is the MSB. M18, M17, N20, N19, N18, P20, P19, P18, R20, R19, P17, R18, T19, T18, U20, V20, U18, U19, V19, W19, Y19, W18, V17, U16, W17, V16, Y17, W16, V15, U14, Y16, W15, V14 RMDAT[32:0] I/O PUB RAM Data Bus This bidirectional three-state bus provides the data path between the IWE8 and the external memory. RMDAT32 is parity bit, RMDAT31 is the MSB. M20 RMCS O Tri RAM Chip Select This signal enables read or write accesses to the external memory L19 RMOE O Tri RAM Output Enable This signal enables the outputs of the external memory M19 RMWR O Tri RAM Write Enable This output is asserted when a write access to the external memory Data Sheet 30 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions Table 6 External RAM Interface (cont'd) Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) L18 RMADC O Tri RAM Address Control This output is asserted to indicate a valid address on RMADR[15:0] W14 RMCLK O Tri RAM Clock Clock output for the external RAM. It runs at the same frequency as CLOCK input 2.2.7 Test Interface Table 7 Test Interface Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Output (O) Function D2 TDO O Tri Boundary Scan Test Data Output E4 TDI I PUA Boundary Scan Test Data Input C1 TCK I PUA Boundary Scan Test Clock D1 TMS I PUA Boundary Scan Test Mode Select 0 = normal operation 1 = Enable boundary scan test mode E3 TRST I PDA Boundary Scan Test Reset V3 TSCEN A11 TSCSH I PDA Internal Test Pins TSCEN and TSCSH must be low for proper operation Y15 PMT PDA V18 TBUS Internal Test Pins 00 = Intel mode 01 = prohibited 10 = prohibited 11 = Motorola Mode Data Sheet 31 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions Table 7 Test Interface (cont'd) Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Output (O) Function W9 UTTR I PUA Utopia TRI-STATE 0 = tristate all Utopia outputs 1 = normal operation Y14 OUTTR I Output TRI-STATE 0 = tristate all outputs and disable all pull-up and pull-down resistors 1 = normal operation 2.2.8 Miscellaneous Table 8 Miscellaneous Pin No. Symbol Input (I) Output (O) Function W1 E1/T1 I PUA E1 or T1 Mode Select 0 = T1 mode 1 = E1 mode U3 EC I PUA Echo Canceller Mode Select 0 = echo canceller mode 1 = standard mode L2 CLOCK I Master Clock Used to clock the core of the device L3 RESET I PDA Master Hardware Reset Asynchronous reset of all flip-flops V2 CLK52 I 51.84 MHz SRTS Reference Clock external reference clock for SRTS. If SRTS mode is not used, it can be connected to VSS Data Sheet 32 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Pin Descriptions 2.2.9 Table 9 Power Supply Power Supply Pin No. Symbol D6, D11, D15, F4, F17, K4, L17, R4, R17, U6, U10, U15 VDD Input (I) Function Output (O) Power Supply Voltage A1, D4, D8, GND D13, D17, H4, H17, N4, N17, U4, U8, U13,U17 2.2.10 Table 10 Not Connected Pins Not Connected Pins Pin No. Symbol B19, D3 N.C. Data Sheet Ground Input (I) Function Output (O) Not Connected 33 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Functional Description 3 Functional Description All functional parts of the device are implemented in hardware. Configuration of the functional blocks has to be done by software via the micro controller interface. The IWE8 provides two independent data paths for upstream, towards the ATM network, and downstream, from the ATM network, direction. For dedicated functional tests loopbacks between both are available. Each of the 8 ports connected to the data path works independent from the others. It can be switched to ATM or AAL mode and provides access to the E1/T1 Framer at different framer interface protocols. Data Sheet 34 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Functional Description 3.1 Operating Modes 3.1.1 ATM Mode A port that is configured to ATM mode offers ITU-T G.804 [26] compliant ATM cell mapping into PDH frames at E1 or T1 datarates. ATM mode can be enabled via "p_atm" in register "pcfN". 3.1.2 AAL Mode A port that is configured to AAL mode offers ATM Forum [10] compliant circuit emulation services via AAL1 as defined in ITU-T I.361.1 [31]. A port N can be configured to AAL mode via "p_atm" in register "pcfN". Some features of the AAL mode are controlled by the internal registers "acfg", "caal", "bp32", "bp10" and "cfil". The features controlled by these registers are common to all AAL ports. Some features of the AAL mode can be controlled per port, by programming the port configuration registers "pcfN". Some features of the AAL mode can be controlled per channel, by programming the channel specific "AAL Reference Slot" in the internal configuration RAM's (RAM1 for receive ports, RAM2, RAM3 and RAM4 for transmit ports). 3.1.2.1 Unstructured CES Mode A 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1) bitstream is packed into ATM cells without any framing. No alignment between octets in E1 or T1 frames and octets in the ATM cells is done. For this Unstructured T1/E1 Circuit Emulation Service (CES) the ATM adaptation layer type 1(AAL1) with Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) as defined in ITU-T I.363.1[31] is used. The use of partially filled cells is possible. For clock recovery the IWE8 supports the Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS) method and Adaptive Clock Method (ACM). * SRTS is possible on channels with completely filled cells * ACM can be used on both, channels with partially and completely filled cells A port is programmed to unstructured CES via "p_ces" in the Port Configuration Register "pcfN". Per port a Segmentation Buffer with a maximum size of 16 cells and a Reassembly Buffer with a maximum size of 256 cells is implemented in external RAM. Data Sheet 35 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Functional Description 3.1.2.2 Structured CES Mode A port is programmed for the Structured T1/E1 Nx64 kbit/s Basic Service (Structured CES) via the port configuration register "pcfN" ("p_ces" = 0). The structured circuit emulation service is intended to carry N of the 24 (T1) or 32 (E1) timeslots across the ATM network. An emulated Nx64 kbit/s circuit will be referred to as a channel throughout this document. It is possible that several channels share the same physical interface port. In structured CES mode neither SRTS nor ACM clock recovery is possible. Data Sheet 36 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Functional Description 3.2 Functional Block Diagram External RAM AAL Segmentation / AAL Reassembly Buffers ATM Transmit / ATM Receive Buffers Cell Insertion / Cell Extraction Buffers Statistics Counters, Threshold Timers x8 Framer Receive Interface SL External RAM Interface RTS Buffer OR UR CR Octet Receive Processing OQ Output Queue Cell Receive Processing / AAL Segmentation IE x8 Cell Insertion Serial Loop Cell Extraction Tx E1/T1 FT x8 Framer Transmit Interface CK OT CT Cell Transmit Processing / AAL Reassembly Octet Transmit Processing EQ Clock & Reset OM Event Queue MP OAM Processing Microprocessor Interface To Microprocessor Figure 6 Data Sheet JTAG Interface Rx UTOPIA Internal Clock Recovery Circuit JT RM UTOPIA Receive Interface Rx E1/T1 FR x8 UT UTOPIA Transmit Interface External Clock Recovery Interface RB Tx UTOPIA ICRC Upstream/Downstream Loop CV IQ Interrupt Queue Ibd2 Block Diagram 37 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Functional Description 3.3 Table 11 Functional Block Description Functions of IWE8 Blocks Block Functions FR Framer Receive interfaces * FRCLK synchronization * 8 bit serial to parallel conversion * Frame and multiframe synchronization * Timeslot counter * Timeslot assignment and channel configuration (RAM1) OR Octet Receive processing ATM ports: * Cell delineation * HEC check: Header error detection and correction * Cell payload de scrambling * Idle or Unassigned Cell Deletion * Statistics counter event generation * Write to ATM Receive Buffer AAL ports: * Segmentation port de correlation * Segmentation * SN/SNP generation * SDT pointer generation * RTS value insertion * Statistics counter event generation * Write to Segmentation Buffer OQ Output Queue * FIFO containing 256 addresses of cells to be sent to UTOPIA Receive CR Cell Receive processing ATM ports: * Read cells from ATM receive buffer AAL ports: * Read cells from AAL segmentation buffer * Padding of partially filled cells UR UTOPIA Receive interface * Cell level handshake * Mapping of framer port number into ATM header in UTOPIA level 1 mode and UTOPIA level 2 single PHY mode * Output buffer for 4 cells Data Sheet 38 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Functional Description Table 11 Functions of IWE8 Blocks (cont'd) Block Functions UL Upstream Loop * Cell loopback from Cell Receive to Cell Transmit processing * Loopback buffer for 4 cells DL Downstream Loop * Cell loopback from UTOPIA Transmit to UTOPIA Receive * Loopback buffer for 4 cells UT UTOPIA Transmit interface * Cell level handshake * Evaluation of framer port number from ATM header in UTOPIA level 1 mode and UTOPIA level 2 singel PHY mode * Input buffer for 4 cells CT Cell Transmit processing Port and channel identification ATM ports: * Write cells to ATM transmit buffer AAL ports: * Port and channel identification * SNP field check * SN field check * SDT pointer detection and verification * RTS value extraction * Extracting reassembly buffer filling for ACM * CAS processing * Statistics counter event generation * Insertion of dummy cells at cell loss * Write to Reassembly Buffer Data Sheet 39 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Functional Description Table 11 Functions of IWE8 Blocks (cont'd) Block Functions OT Octet Transmit processing ATM ports: * Reading octets from ATM Transmit Buffer * Cell rate de coupling: idle/unassigned cell insertion * Cell payload scrambling * HEC generation AAL ports: * Read octets from Reassembly Buffer * Handling of Reassembly Buffer Overflow * Handling of Reassembly Buffer underflow * Reassembly Buffer initialization to compensate CDV * Synchronization of AAL1 start of structure with synchronization pulse of framer port * Statistics counter event generation FT Framer Transmit interfaces * FTCKO synchronization * 8 bit parallel to serial conversion * Generation of frame and multiframe synchronization signals * Timeslot counter * Timeslot assignment and channel configuration (RAM2, RAM3, RAM4) SL Serial Loop * Serial loopback from Framer Transmit to Framer Receive OM OAM processing * Processing of OAM counter events * Interrupt queue control * Microprocessor access control to external RAM EQ Event Queue * FIFO of 256 OAM counter events MP Microprocessor interface * Synchronization of asynchronous microprocessor interface signals * Internal registers * Interrupt generation RM External RAM interface * Generation of external RAM interface signals * Generation of basic RAM cycle * Access control to external RAM for different blocks * Parity generation and checking Data Sheet 40 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Functional Description Table 11 Functions of IWE8 Blocks (cont'd) Block Functions CV External Clock Recovery interface * Generation of serial communication frames to external clock recovery circuit, containing RTS values and or ACM buffer filling * Generation of synchronization for RTS generation by external clock recovery circuit. * Reception of frames with RTS values from external clock recovery circuit RB RTS Buffer * Buffer for 2 incoming RTS values per port CK Clock & Reset * Clock distribution * Reset control JT JTAG interface * Boundary Scan register * TAP controller ICRC Internal Clock Recovery Circuit * Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS * Adaptive Clock Method ACM External RAM ATM Transmit Buffer * Compensate packetization delay on the PDH interface. * Maximum size of 256 ATM cells per port. * Maximum size of 64 octets per ATM cell. ATM Receive Buffer * Maximum size of 16 ATM cells per port. * Maximum size of 64 octets per ATM cell. Segmentation Buffer * Compensate segmentation delay in the ATM network. * 1024 bytes per port (unstructured CES) * 256 bytes per timeslot (structured CES) Reassembly Buffer * Compensate the Cell Delay Variation (CDV) of the ATM network. * 512 bytes per timeslot. (structured CES) Data Sheet 41 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4 Operational Description 4.1 ATM Transmit Functions For ports configured to ATM mode the following data flow is valid: The Cell Transmit Processing block is responsible for: * Cell discarding * Write ATM cells except of UDF octet to ATM Transmit Buffer The Octet Transmit Processing block is responsible for: * * * * Reading octets from ATM Transmit Buffer Cell rate de-coupling: idle/unassigned cell insertion Cell payload scrambling HEC generation The ATM transmit functions are controlled by the internal registers "catm", "atmc" and "txid". The features controlled by these registers are common to all ATM ports. Some features of the ATM transmit functions can be controlled per port, by programming the port specific "ATM Transmit Reference Slot" in the internal configuration RAM2 4.1.1 Operation 4.1.1.1 ATM Transmit Buffer Filling Level The amount of buffered data in transmit direction of each port is adjustable in granularity of bytes or cells. This allows a controlled transmission delay while maintaining a continuous ATM cell flow. The feature is implemented using the port specific back pressure mechanism of the UTOPIA interface (Chapter 5.2.2). The granularity and range of filling level are set independently per port in the "p_thr_m" bits of the Port Configuration Registers ("pcfN", see Chapter 7.1). The port specific threshold value is defined via the corresponding Threshold Port Register ("thrspN", see Chapter 7.38 to Chapter 7.41) 2 Modes are supported: * Mode 1 (p_thr_m = 01B) allows the definition of threshold values in the range of 0 to 255 cells. The actual value equals the contents of thrspN. * Mode 2 (p_thr_m = 10B) allows the definition of threshold values in the range of 0 to 222 bytes. The actual value equals 53 * C + B, with C representing the 2 most significant bits of thrspN and B representing the 6 least significant bits of thrspN. All other values of p_thr_m will switch off this feature and reset the internal counter. To avoid deadlock conditions, the contents of the common 8 cell UTOPIA input buffer will always be flushed into the port specific Transmit Buffers independent from their back Data Sheet 42 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description pressure state. This results in two side effects, which have to be taken into account for the calculation of threshold values. * After back pressure state has been entered, up to 8 additional cells may be transferred from the UTOPIA input buffer to the port buffer. * Before a certain cell can cause port specific back pressure, it has to traverse the UTOPIA input buffer, resulting in a delay of 4.2 to 16.8 s. 4.1.1.2 Cell Discarding The discarding of cells is available for ATM ports. It can depend on * Buffer filling level and CLP (Bit 0 of the 4th ATM header octet) * Buffer filling level and CLPI (Cell Loss Priority Internal, bit 6 of the UDF octet at the UTOPIA interface) The bit ENB, bit 5 of the UDF octet at the UTOPIA interface, is responsible for the decision if discarding shall base on CLP or CLPI. For bit locations see Figure 30. The buffer threshold for discarding cells is configured by register "thrshld" and applies to all ports. Cells that are going to be extracted via the microprocessor interface will be ignored by the cell discard mechanism Table 12 ATM Cell Discarding ENB CLPI CLP Discarding 0 x 0 No 0 x 1 Yes, if buffer threshold has been exceeded 1 0 x No 1 1 x Yes, if buffer threshold has been exceeded 4.1.1.3 Cell rate de-coupling: Idle/Unassigned Cell Insertion When the ATM Transmit Buffer of a port is empty, idle or unassigned cells are transmitted to provide cell rate de-coupling. Idle cells are transmitted as defined in the ITU-T I.361 [30]. Unassigned cells can be inserted, as defined in the B-ISDN UNI and NNI physical layer generic criteria [15]. The 4 MSBs of header octet 1 and the 4 LSBs of header octet 4 are programmable in the "prg_tx_hd" field of the TX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (txid, see Chapter 7.10). All other header bits will be 0. Data Sheet 43 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description octet 1 GFC[3:0]/VPI[11:8] = prg_tx_hd[7:4] VPI[7:4] = 0000B octet 2 VPI[3:0] = 0000B VCI[15:12] = 0000B octet 3 octet 4 VCI[11:4] = 0000_0000B VCI[3:0] = 0000B PTI[2:0] = prg_tx_hd[3:1] octet 5 UDF octet 6 prg_tx_pl[7:0] . CLP = prg_tx_ hd[0] . octet 53 prg_tx_pl[7:0] * If idle cell insertion according to ITU-T I.361 or ITU-T I.432.1 is desired, the "prg_tx_hd" field of "txid" should be set to 0000_0001B. * If unassigned cell insertion at the NNI or uncontrolled UNI according to ITU-T I.361 is desired, the "prg_tx_hd" field of "txid" should be set to 0000 XXX0. For X any value is allowed. The payload of idle or unassigned cells consists of the same octet which is repeated 48 times. It is programmable by the "prg_tx_pl" field of the "txid" register. * For ITU-T I.432.1 compliant idle cells, the "prg_tx_pl" field of "txid" should be set to 0110_1010B. * The pre-assigned values of the information field of all unassigned cells are for further study (ITU-T I.361 [30]) 4.1.1.4 Cell Payload Scrambling ITU-T I.432.3 [34] recommends the self-synchronizing scrambler x43+1 for payload scrambling at E1 datarates. For T1 no scrambling is recommended, which the IWE8 supports. The scrambler function is implemented in the device. It can be disabled per port by the x43_scrambling bit in the "ATM Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM2. 4.1.1.5 HEC Generation The HEC generation is implemented according to ITU-T I.432.1 [33] using the generator polynomial x8 + x2 + x + 1. To significantly improve the cell delineation performance in the case of bit-slips it is recommended that * the check bits are added (modulo 2) to an 8-bit pattern (coset) before being inserted in the last octet of the header. * the recommended pattern is "0101 0101". Data Sheet 44 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description * the receiver must subtract (equal to add modulo 2) the same pattern from the 8 HEC bits before calculating the syndrome of the header. As an example, if the first 4 octets of the header were all zeros the generated header before scrambling would be "00000000_00000000_00000000_00000000_01010101". The starting value for the polynomial check is 0s (binary) The coset value is programmable in the ATM Control Register ("atmc", see Chapter 7.8). 4.1.2 Setup of ATM Transmit Ports Each ATM transmit port can be configured in the "channel_mode" field of the "ATM Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM2 to operate in "Inactive", "Active" or "Standby" mode. In "Inactive" mode, byte-pattern 0 "bp0" is continuously sent to the framer transmit interface. In "Active" mode, user cells or idle/unassigned cells are sent to the framer transmit interface. In "Standby" mode, only idle/unassigned cells are sent to the framer transmit interface. When activating ATM transmit ports, it is important to follow the initialization sequence as shown in Table 13. Step 2 must be held at least 250 s to internally reset the ATM transmit port. During this time the device connected to the Framer Receive Interface has to be in normal operation allowing the IWE8 to synchronize itself on the frame pulse. Table 13 Activation sequence for ATM transmit ports Step pcfN. p_tx_act ATM Transmit Reference Slot. channel_mode 1 0 = inactive 00 = Inactive 2 1 = active 00 = Inactive 3 1 = active 01 or 11 = Active Data Sheet Minimum Time 250 s 45 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.2 ATM Receive Functions For ports configured to ATM mode the following data flow is valid: The Octet Receive Processing block is responsible for: * * * * * * Cell delineation HEC check: Header error detection and correction Cell payload de-scrambling Idle or Unassigned Cell Deletion Statistics counter event generation Write cells except of UDF octet to ATM Receive Buffer The Cell Receive Processing block is responsible for: * Read cells from ATM Receive Buffer The ATM receive functions are controlled by the internal registers "catm", "atmc" and "rxid". The features controlled by these registers are common to all ATM ports. Some features can be controlled per port. They were configured by programming the port specific "ATM Receive Reference Slot" in the internal configuration RAM. 4.2.1 Operation 4.2.1.1 Cell Delineation The cell delineation algorithm is implemented according to the ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1 [33]. To support detection of "Out of Cell Delineation" (OCD) anomalies and "Loss of Cell Delineation" (LCD) defect, the IWE8 generates an interrupt in eis4 (Chapter 7.22) whenever the SYNC state is left or entered. The generation of interrupts is controllable on a per port basis through fields in the "ATM Receive Reference Slot" of RAM1 (Chapter 6.1.1.1). It is also possible to see the current state of the cell delineation FSM (Finite State Machine) in the Cell Delineation FSM Status Register ("cdfs", see Chapter 7.15). The software can then start a timer (e.g. timer_set_1 provided by the IWE8) to establish the LCD defect state. As octet boundaries are available within the receive physical layer prior to cell delineation, the cell delineation process is performed octet by octet in the HUNT state. As long as the cell delineation is not in the SYNC state, received octets are discarded. The ALPHA and DELTA parameters, which influence the robustness of the algorithm against false misalignment due to bit errors (ALPHA) and false delineation in the re synchronization process (DELTA), are programmable to values between 0 and 15 in the ATM Control Register (atmc, see Chapter 7.8), These settings are common for all ATM ports. ITU-T I.432.1 [33] recommends: Data Sheet 46 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description * for the Cell-based Physical Layer, ALPHA = 7 and DELTA = 8. * for the Frame-based Physical Layer, ALPHA = 7 and DELTA = 6. * for other systems, values for ALPHA and DELTA are for further study. Bit by bit Correct HEC HUNT Incorrect HEC PRESYNC Cell by cell ALPHA consecutive incorrect HEC DELTA consecutive correct HEC SYNC Cell by cell Note - The "correct HEC" means the header has no bit error (syndrome is zero) and has not been corrected Figure 7 I432-1-Fig5 Cell delineation state diagram (Figure 5/I.432.1) note 1 note 3 OCD anomally Working LCD defect note 2 note 4 note1 Triggered by state transition (Case A) due to alpha consecutive incorrect HECs in the cell delineation process (Fig. 5 of ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1) note2 Triggered by state transition (Case B) due to delta consecutive correct HECs in thecell delineation process (Fig. 5 of ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1) note3 Triggered by 50 continuous ms in the OCD anomaly maintenance state note4 Triggered by 50 continuous ms in the cell delineation "Sync" state (Fig.5 of ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1)" I432-3-Fig2 Figure 8 Data Sheet Maintenance state transitions for cell delineation (Figure 2/ I.432.3) 47 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description The Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) state is entered whenever the Out of Cell (OCD) state is continuously active for more than an user defined period of time, ITU-T I.432.1 recommends a persistence time of 50ms. For each port a separate timer is implemented. All timers can be enabled via the lcd_en bit in the LCD Timer Register ("lcdtimer", see Chapter 7.43). The global preload value is defined by the "lcd_val" bits in lcdtimer. After expiration of each timer, an "lcd_start" interrupt is generated, indicated in the Interrupt Status Register 1 (isr1, see Chapter 7.18) and the Extended Interrupt Status Register 0 (eis0, see Chapter 7.42). If enabled, the timer is started at the transition from SYNC to OCD-state. After expiration LCD state is entered. Whenever the SYNC state is entered before the timer expires, the timer is reset. The transition from LCD to Working state follows the same procedure. If after the LCD state the SYNC state is entered again, the timer is started and after expiration the maintenance state machine is in working state again. In parallel an "lcd_end" interrupt is generated indicated in "isr1" and "eis0". If synchronization is lost again during the timer period, LCD state is reentered and the timer is reset. To force resynchronization of the cell delineation process, the microprocessor can force individual ports to enter the HUNT state, by setting the bit "go_hunt" in the corresponding "ATM Receive Reference Slot" of RAM1 (Chapter 6.1.1.1). 4.2.1.2 HEC Check: Header Error Detection and Correction The Header Error Control (HEC) is implemented according to the ITU-T I.432.1 B-ISDN user-network interface - Physical layer specification [33]. According to the HEC algorithm, cells are discarded when a multi-bit header error is detected in the Correction mode or a header error is detected in the Detection mode. According to the HEC algorithm, cells are corrected when a single-bit error is detected in the Correction mode. . Multi-bit error detected (Cell discarded) No error detected (No action) Corrrection Mode No error detected (No action) Detection Mode Single-bit error detected (Correction) Figure 9 Error detected (Cell discarded) I432-1-Fig3 HEC: Receiver mode of Operation (Figure 3/ITU I.432.1) The pure HEC detection mode as recommended by the ATM Forum is selectable via bit "a_hec_algor" in register acfg (see Chapter 7.2) Data Sheet 48 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description . No error detected Detection Mode Error detected Cell discarded Atmfhec Figure 10 HEC Detection According to ATM Forum No discarding of HEC errored cells as an option is available and selectable via bit "a_hec_mode" in the register acfg (Chapter 7.2). In this case an errored HEC is indicated by setting the most significant bit in the UDF field at the UTOPIA receive interface. For correct operation bit P_CELL_DIS must be cleared. 4.2.1.3 Cell Payload Descrambling ITU-T I.432.3 [34] recommends the self-synchronizing scrambler x43+1 for payload scrambling at E1 data rates. For T1 no scrambling is recommended. The self-synchronizing scrambler function is implemented in the device. It can be disabled per port by the x43_descrambling bit in the "ATM Receive Reference Slot" in RAM1. 4.2.1.4 Idle, Physical Layer or Unassigned Cell Deletion According to ITU-T I.361 [30], idle cells, physical layer OAM cells and cells reserved for use by the physical layer are not passed to the ATM layer at the UNI. Data Sheet 49 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description Octet 1 Octet 2 Octet 3 Octet 4 Idle cell identification (Notes 1 and 2) 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/0001 Physical OAM cell identification (Note 2) layer 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/1001 Reserved for use of the physical layer (Notes 1, 2 and 3) PPPP/0000 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/PPP1 P: Indicates the bit is available for use by the physical layer Values assigned to these but have no meaning with respect to the fields occupying the corresponding bit positions at the ATM layer Notes: 1 In the case of physical layer cells, the bit in the location of the CLP indication is not used for the CLP mechanism as specified in 3.4.2.3.2/I.150. 2 Cells having header values which are identified as idle, physical layer OAM, and reserved for use by the physical layer are not passed to the ATM layer from the physical layer. 3 Specific pre-assigned physical layer cell header values are given in Recommendation I.432 Figure 11 Pre-assigned cell header values at the UNI (Table 1/I.361) In contrast to this the ATM-Forum recommends in the User-network interface specification that the receiving ATM entity is responsible for extraction and discarding of unassigned and idle cells. Use Octet 1 Octet 2 Octet 3 Octet 4 invalid XXXX/0000 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/XXX1 unassigned 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/XXX0 X: Indicates "don't care" bits Figure 12 Pre-defined header field values [11] The RX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (rxid, see Chapter 7.9) can be used in order to achieve ITU-T or ATM-Forum compliance. The 4 MSBs of header octet 1 and the 4 LSBs of header octet 4 of the received cells to be discarded are programmable in bits "prg_rx_hd". All other header bits must be 0. On top the "msk_rx_hd" field of "rxid" allows to mask all or some of these bits. The masked bits are considered as "don't care". * If ITU-T I.361 compliance is desired, the "prg_rx_hd" field should be set to 0000 0001. If only idle cells should be deleted, the "msk_rx_hd" should be set to 0000 0000. If all physical layer cells should be deleted, the "msk_rx_hd" should be set to 1111 1110. Data Sheet 50 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description * For ATM Forum compliance, the "prg_rx_hd" field should be set to 0000 0000. The "msk_rx_hd" should be set to 1111 1110. This configuration will delete all unassigned cells. The deletion of idle, physical layer or unassigned cells can be enabled or disabled per port by "delete_idle_cells" in the "ATM Receive Reference Slot" of RAM1 (Chapter 6.1.1.1). 4.2.2 Setup of ATM Receive Ports Each ATM receive port can be configured in the "channel_mode" field of the "ATM Receive Reference Slot" in RAM1 to operate in "Inactive", "Active" or "Standby" mode. In "Inactive" mode, no data is accepted from the framer receive interface. In "Active" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface, cells are written into the ATM Receive Buffer and cell addresses are written into the Output Queue. In "Standby" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface but no cells are written into the ATM Receive Buffer or the Output Queue. This mode can be used to test the cell delineation. When activating ATM receive ports, it is important to follow the initialization sequence as shown in Table 14. Step 2 must be held at least 250 s to internally reset the ATM receive port. During this time the device connected to the Framer Transmit Interface has to be in normal operation allowing the IWE8 to synchronize itself on the frame pulse. Table 14 Activation sequence for ATM receive ports Step pcfN. p_rx_act ATM Receive Reference Slot. channel_mode 1 0 = inactive 00 = Inactive 2 1 = active 00 = Inactive 3 1 = active 01 or 11 = Active Data Sheet Minimum Time 250 s 51 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.3 AAL Segmentation Functions This function implements the Convergency Sublayer for Structured Data Transfer (SDT) and Unstructured Data Transfer as well as the Segmentation Sublayer for AAL type 1 as described in ITU-T recommendation I.363.1 [31]. The structure of AAL1 SAR-PDU is shown in Chapter 12. The Octet Receive Processing block is responsible for: * * * * * * * Segmentation port decorrelation Segmentation SN/SNP generation SDT pointer generation RTS value insertion Statistics counter event generation Write to Segmentation Buffer The Cell Receive Processing block is responsible for: * Read cells from Segmentation Buffer * Padding of partially filled cells 4.3.1 Operation 4.3.1.1 Segmentation Port Decorrelation In synchronous systems, the microprocessor may activate a number of channels consecutively, in phase with the segmentation period of a particular channel, causing a large number of cells to be generated within the same 125 s period. This would result in a large number of cells residing in the Output Queue and increase the Cell Delay Variation (CDV). To avoid this, a decorrelation circuit has been implemented in the "Octet Receive processing" (OR), that inserts a random waiting period between activation of a channel and start of cell segmentation. This feature can be activated by setting bit "dcor" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot" of the channel in RAM1. Otherwise segmentation is started as soon as the channel has been activated by the microprocessor (field "channel_mode") The decorrelation circuit consists of a free-running 5-bit counter at a frequency of FCLOCK/ 3360 (7.5 KHz if FCLOCK= 25 MHz) a register containing a random number (bits "dcor_random_nr") and a comparator. Each time an octet for this channel is received the counter is compared with the random value. Only when both values are equal, segmentation is started. When using the decorrelation circuit make sure that the random number is written to the "dcor_random_nr" field of the "AAL Receive Reference Slot" before activating the channel with "channel_mode" Data Sheet 52 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description In SDT mode, the cells are segmented when the first (multi) frame synchronization pulse after segmentation start is received from the framer receive interface of that channel. The resulting SC value and pointer field of the first cell transmitted will both be 0. 4.3.1.2 Segmentation The segmentation and reassembly function can be programmed to use, alternatively to the standard AAL type 1 SAR-PDU, a SAR-PDU that is referred to as AAL type 0 and consists of 48 octets payload without any overhead. The selection is done by programming the "AAL0" field in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". AAL Type 0 Figure 13 shows the AAL type 0 SAR-PDU. It is possible to fill only part of the SAR-PDU payload with User Information octets by programming field "part_fill" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot" of RAM1 to values smaller than 48. A A L user info D um m y Fill N o cte ts SAR SDU PDU A TM H eader A TM -S D U = S A R -P D U 5 o cte ts 4 8 o cte ts = S e g m e n ta tio n & R ea sse m b ly = S e rvice D a ta U n it = P ro to co l D a ta U n it Figure 13 A TM Layer Aal0 SAR-PDU of AAL Type 0 AAL Type 1 SDT Structure Length For Structured Circuit Emulation Service as defined by the ATM-Forum in "Circuit Emulation Services Version 2.0" [10] Structured Data Transfer (SDT) is used. The structure length used for SDT in ATM cells is: * N when frame-based SDT is selected * N x 16 when CRC multiframe-based SDT is selected for E1 ports * N x 24 when superframe-based SDT or extended superframe-based SDT is selected for T1 ports. The selection between frame-based or multiframe-based SDT is done by the bit "sdt_mfs" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". 4.3.1.3 Transport of the Framer Port Number If the UTOPIA interface is configured for level 2 MPHY mode, the framer port number is transported via the UTOPIA address bits. In UTOPIA level 1 and UTOPIA level 2 single PHY mode the framer port number is mapped into the ATM Header (see Chapter 5.2.3). Data Sheet 53 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.3.1.4 Transport of CAS Information The four CAS bits for each timeslot are transported within one multiframe from the framer to the IWE8. A signalling buffer in the internal RAM (256 x 4 x 2bit) holds the CAS bits from the framer interface. The activation of CAS packetization can be done via "p_cas" in the register "pcfN". The CAS bits will be packed in a signalling substructure after the payload of one multiframe has been packetized. 4.3.1.5 CAS Conditioning and Freezing Upstream Normally the framer device is responsible for signalling freezing or signalling conditioning in case of line failure. If the framer doesn't support the feature the IWE8 can also fulfill the requirements according to Bellcore TR-NWT-000170 [14]. Pin "FRLOS = 1" indicates that the CAS information from the framer device is invalid and CAS conditioning or freezing upstream is starting. This state remains active until valid CAS bits are available indicated by "FRLOS = 0". CAS freezing means that the last valid CAS information is repeated as long as the error cause exists. In case of CAS conditioning for each timeslot individual CAS conditioning nibbles are sent instead. Selection between both procedures is done by setting "sig_cond" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". If the channel bandwidth is one slot, the signalling conditioning nibbles are defined in the field "next_slot_nr" of the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". If the channel bandwidth is more than one slot, the signalling conditioning nibbles are defined in the "sig_cond_nibble" of the "AAL Receive Continuation Slot". In the latter case the signalling conditioning nibbles defined in the first "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" are used for the first two slots. Table 15 Definition of the CAS Signalling Conditioning Nibbles. Slot Number Channel Bandwidth = 1 Slot Channel Bandwidth >= 2 Slots 1 "next_slot_nr" of the "AAL Receive Reference Slot" "sig_cond_nibble" of the first "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" 2 - "sig_cond_nibble" of the first "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" 3 - "sig_cond_nibble" of the second "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" N - "sig_cond_nibble" of the N-1th "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" Data Sheet 54 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.3.1.6 Segmentation Buffer The Segmentation Buffer is located in external RAM providing 256 bytes of memory for each timeslot, totalling to 64 KB for 8 ports with 32 timeslots each. The buffer for each timeslot consists of 4 blocks with 64 octets: Buffer size = 8 Ports x 32 Channels x 4 Blocks x 64 Octets [1] In unstructured CES mode, one Segmentation Buffer per port provides 16 blocks. In structured CES mode, a Segmentation Buffer per channel with a variable capacity depending on the number of channels and the cell filling level is automatically configured by the IWE8. The number of memory blocks depends on the bandwidth of the channel. Thus for structured CES with N x 64-kbit/s there are N x 4 blocks per connection. Each channel can occupy 1, 2 or 4 block-groups (4, 8 or 16 blocks). The first block-group defines the reference slot number of the channel. The second, third and fourth blockgroups define the number of the corresponding interface slot of the channel. The one-to-one relationship between timeslots and groups of memory blocks allows dynamic re-configuration of a specific channel without disturbing other channels of the same port. Table 16 Relationship betw. Cell Filling & Segmentation Buffer Subblock Size Cell Filling AAL1, no SDT (octets) Cell Filling AAL1, with SDT (octets) Octets per block Cells per block Octets per cell 25-48 25-47 25-47 64 1 64 4-24 4-24 4-24 64 2 32 Cell Filling AAL0 (octets) 4.3.1.7 Padding Partially Filled Cells The value, used for dummy fill of partially filled cells, is programmable in the Cell Fill Register for Partially Filled Cells ("cfil", see Chapter 7.12). The fill octets carry no information and are ignored at the receiver. Table 17 shows valid values for the cell filling level, which can be configured in the field part_fill of RAM1: AAL Receive Reference Slot (see Chapter 6.1.1.3) and RAM2: AAL Transmit Reference Slot (see Chapter 6.1.2.3). All other values are illegal. Data Sheet 55 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description Table 17 Cell Filling level values ATM Adaptation Layer Type Partially Filled Completely Filled Minimum Maximum AAL0 4 47 48 AAL1 4 46 471)2) AAL1 with CAS 4+Cb3) 46 472) 1) If frame based SDT without CAS is used and filling level 45, the condition band_width part_fill has to be fulfilled for correct operation. Multiframe based SDT without CAS should not be used. 2) non-P format, cell may have only 46 user data octets in P format 3) Cb: Required bytes for the CAS subblock in an ATM cell = RoundUp(N/2) 4.3.2 Setup of AAL Segmentation Channels In "Inactive" mode, no data is accepted from the framer receive interface. In "Active" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface, segmented and cells are written into the Segmentation Buffers and the Output Queue. In "Standby" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface but no cells are written in the Segmentation Buffers. In "Substitute" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface, but substituted by a programmable byte-pattern selected by "subst_bpslct" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". Cells are written into the Segmentation Buffers and the Output Queue. This mode can be used for trunc conditioning to indicate idle (bit pattern = 0x7F) or outof-service conditions (bit pattern = 0x1A) according to af-vtoa-0078 [10] and TR-NWT000170 [14] When activating the AAL segmentation channels, it is important to follow the initialization sequence as shown in Table 18. Step 2 must be held at least 250 s to internally reset the AAL channel. During this time the device connected to the Framer Receive Interface has to be in normal operation allowing the IWE8 to synchronize itself on the frame pulse. Table 18 Activation sequence for AAL segmentation channels Step pcfN p_rx_act AAL Receive Reference Slot. channel_mode 1 0 = inactive 00 = inactive 2 1 = active 00 = inactive 3 1 = active 01 or 11 = active Data Sheet Minimum Time 250 s 56 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description The RTS value stored in the RTS buffer of the port is loaded from the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit ICRC or from the Clock Recovery Interface. A new value will be provided by the ICRC once every cycle of 8 cells. To guarantee that the value stored in the RTS buffer of the port is correct, the procedure indicated in Figure 14 is followed. Start of Segmentation 1st Cycle of 8 Cells; Dummy RTS Value Transmitted 0 1 Reset of RTS generator Figure 14 2 3 4 5 6 2nd Cycle of 8 Cells; Dummy RTS Value Transmitted 3rd Cycle of 8 Cells; 1st RTS Value Transmitted 7 1st RTS Value Received 2nd RTS Value Received sorgwsos Synchronization of SRTS Generation with the Start of Segmentation After the start of segmentation, during the 1st cycle of 8 cells, the RTS generator of the corresponding port is reset. If an external clock recovery circuit is used, it is reset by writing a reset frame for the corresponding port on the Clock Recovery Interface. During this cycle a dummy RTS value is transmitted. During the 2nd cycle of 8 cells, the IWE8 expects to receive the first valid RTS value while transmitting a dummy RTS value. During the following cycles of 8 cells the RTS value received in the previous cycle will be transmitted. The dummy RTS value is programmable with "a_dummy_srts" in the register "acfg" and is common for all ports. It must be programmed before the a_crv_en bit in "acfg" is made active. Otherwise the first 2 RTS values transmitted will be fixed at "0000". If the ICRC does not provide new RTS values to the RTS Transmit Buffer (buffer underflow), the last received value is repeated. If too many RTS values are provided (buffer overflow), the values in excess will be omitted and a "rts_overflow" bit in the Extended Interrupt Status Register 2 "eis2" is set. Data Sheet 57 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.4 AAL Reassembly Functions When AAL type 0 is enabled in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot", the SAR-PDU and SAR-SDU processing is disabled. When AAL type 0 is disabled in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot", the SAR-PDU header is processed according to AAL type 1 as defined in ITU-T I.363.1 [31]. For ports configured to AAL mode the following data flow is valid: The cell transmit processing block is responsible for: * * * * * * * * * Port and channel identification SNP field check SN field check SDT pointer detection and verification SRTS value extraction CAS processing Statistics counter event generation Insertion of dummy cells at cell loss Write to Reassembly Buffer The octet transmit processing block is responsible for: * * * * * * Read octets from Reassembly Buffer Handling of Reassembly Buffer Overflow Handling of Reassembly Buffer underflow Reassembly Buffer initialization to compensate CDV Synchronization of SDT structure with port structure Statistics counter event generation 4.4.1 Operation 4.4.1.1 Port and Channel Identification Before an incoming cell is processed, it is determined to which port and channel the cell is destined. This information is retrieved from the UTOPIA interface (see Chapter 5.2.3). 4.4.1.2 Sequence Number Protection field check When an un-correctable multi-bit error is detected the Sequence Number (SN) field of the SAR-PDU header is declared invalid, otherwise the SN field is valid. The function can be enabled or disabled by the bit "snp_check" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot". If disabled the SN of all incoming cells are declared valid. Data Sheet 58 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.4.1.3 Sequence Number field check This function implements the sequence number processing. It can be enabled via bit "sn_check" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot". If enabled, selection can be made between Robust and Fast Sequence Count Algorithm as defined in the ITU-T I.363.1 [31] by "sn_fast" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot". If SN check is disabled, all cells are accepted, no cells are discarded, lost and misinserted cells are not detected. 4.4.1.4 RTS Extraction and Verification When the clock recovery verification is enabled ("crv_en" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot"), and the port is configured for SRTS ("p_rts" = 1), RTS values are extracted and verified. The RTS value consists of the four CSI bits of the cells with odd SC values within a cycle of 8 cells. A RTS value is accepted as correct if the following condition is true: * The SN field is valid * Four consecutive odd SC values (1, 3, 5 or 7) were received in the previous cycle of 8 cells Otherwise the dummy RTS-value is used. When the start of a new cycle is detected, the RTS value of the previous cycle is written to the ICRC. 4.4.1.5 Pointer Field Detection and Verification When SDT is enabled ("sdt" = 1 in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot"), it is assumed that the channel is using Structured Data Transfer. The SAR-PDU payload is supposed to be of the P format under the following conditions: * The SN field is valid * Even SC value (0, 2, 4 or 6) * The CSI field = 1 When the "sdt_once" bit in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" is set to 1, only the first cell with CSI bit = 1 in a cycle of 8 cells is supposed to contain a P format SAR-SDU. The other cells with CSI bit = 1 within the same cycle are treated as non-P format. This operation is recommended by ITU-T I.363.1 [31] In the cells that are supposed to contain a P format SAR-SDU, the pointer field is verified and accepted under the following conditions: * The parity bit is correct as defined in the ITU-T I.363.1 [31] * The value of the offset field is between 0 and 93 or is the dummy value 127. If an invalid pointer field (93 < pointer < 127) is detected, its content is replaced by the dummy value (127). The SAR-SDU is processed as if it would have been received with a dummy pointer value. The P format of the SAR-PDU payload is assumed and the first octet of the SAR-PDU payload is not processed as user information. Data Sheet 59 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description The bit "sdt_par" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" allows to disable the verification of the parity bit in the pointer field. For multiframe based SDT the bit "sdt_mfs" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" has to be set. 4.4.1.6 CAS Conditioning and Freezing Downstream An internal signalling buffer holds the CAS bits. In case of buffer underflow or pointer mismatch the IWE8 provides downstream CAS conditioning and freezing according to Bellcore TR-NWT-000170 [14]. The selection between both is done individually for each channel via Bit "cond_en" in the "AAL Transmit Conditioning Slot" of RAM4. Values for conditioning can be selected via the "cond_down_nibble" bits in the same register. The spare and alarm indication bits of the first E1 frame can be programmed by setting bits cas0portN in the registers "cas1" and "cas2". The CAS information of idle timeslots can be chosen by setting bits in the register "cas3". 4.4.1.7 Insertion of Dummy Cells at Cell Loss Upon cell loss detection, the sequence count algorithm will insert dummy cells into the Reassembly Buffer to maintain bit count integrity. The maximum amount of consecutively inserted cells is 6. These dummy cells are physically inserted when reading the Reassembly Buffer. The Reassembly Buffer itself contains only control field in front of the payload of the next accepted cell, indicating the amount of dummy cells to be inserted. Inserted dummy cells are not taken into account for the ACM Reassembly Buffer filling level calculation. This means that the buffer filling level is incorrect as long as dummy cells are physically inserted. The data octet used for the dummy cells is the byte-pattern selected by the "starv_bpslct" field of the "AAL transmit reference slot" of RAM3. 4.4.1.8 Reassembly Buffer The purpose of the Reassembly Buffer is to compensate the Cell Delay Variation (CDV) of the ATM network. It is located in external RAM providing 512 byte of memory for each timeslot, totalling to 128 KB for 8 ports with 32 timeslots each. The buffer for each timeslot consists of 8 memory blocks with 64 octets: Buffer size = 8 Ports x 32 Channels x 8 Blocks x 64 Octets Data Sheet 60 [2] 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description The number of memory blocks used depends on the bandwidth of the channel (N*64kbit/s). Thus for structured CES with N*64-kbit/s there are N x 8 memory blocks per connection. The one-to-one relationship between timeslots and groups of memory blocks allows dynamic re-configuration of a specific channel without disturbing other channels of the same port. 4.4.1.9 Handling of Reassembly Buffer Overflow Overflow is detected when, at the moment of storing an accepted cell, the extra payload of the new cell in the buffer would exceed the logical size of the Reassembly Buffer. For AAL type 1 two possible actions exist: * The cell is discarded. Re-initialization of the Reassembly Buffer as described in Chapter 4.4.2.4 is in line with the ITU-T I.361.1 [31] * The cell is accepted but the Reassembly Buffer is automatically re-initialized. Re-initialization is done automatically without disturbing the microprocessor. The action chosen is determined by the "auto_reinit_of" field in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3. When using AAL type 0, the accepted cell is considered to be a misinserted cell and rejected. 4.4.1.10 Handling of Reassembly Buffer Underflow An underflow period is detected when no octets are available in the Reassembly Buffer to be passed to the framer transmit interface. During the underflow period starvation octets are passed to the framer transmit interface and Statistics Counter 12 increments if enabled. For AAL type 1, the underflow is considered to be caused by an extremely late cell. The length of the underflow period is measured by counting the number of transmitted starvation octets, expressed as a number of starvation cells that are counted by Statistics Counter 13 if enabled For resolving the underflow two possibilities exist: * Manual re-initialization: Re-initialization of the Reassembly Buffer as described in Chapter 4.4.2.4 is in line with the ITU-T I.361.1 [31] * Automatic re-initialization: As soon as start of underflow is detected, the Reassembly Buffer is re-initialized without disturbing the microprocessor. Thus, the underflow status for the device is no longer valid although the underflow condition still exists. No starvation cells due to underflow will be inserted and counter 13 will not increment Data Sheet 61 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description The action chosen is determined by the "auto_reinit_uf" field in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3. For AAL type 0 the detection of an underflow period is considered to be the detection of cell loss. For this reason a dummy cell is inserted. The inserted dummy cell must be reflected in the buffer filling level of the Reassembly Buffer. 4.4.1.11 Synchronization of SDT Structure with Port Structure In normal operation the "ATM start of structure" is synchronized with the "Port start of structure". Since this synchronization may get lost, the coincidence of both events is monitored. If they do mismatch, a two bit error counter is incremented. Upon reaching a programmable threshold, the Reassembly Buffer is re-initialized and Statistics Counter 14 is incremented if enabled. The threshold value is programmed in the "sdt_oos_nr" field of the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM2. If the Statistics Counter 14 should reflect "atmfCESPointerReframes" as defined in [10], "sdt_oos_nr" should be set to "00". To compensate cell loss the Sequence Count algorithm inserts dummy cells filled with starvation octets. In case the cell filling level is 46 octets or less, the bit count integrity won't be violated as the length of the AAL-user information within one SAR-SDU is always the same. When operating with a cell-filling of 47 octets, the AAL-user information maybe 47 octet in case of non-P format or 46 octet in case of P format SARPDU. As the information on the lost cell's SAR-PDU format is not available, it is possible that an excess of starvation octets is transmitted. As a result, the "ATM start of structure" might be out of phase with the "Port start of structure". The following procedure is implemented for re-synchronization: * At the end of expanding a burst of dummy cells a flag is set, indicating that a phase shift might occur. The maximum phase shift is 2 octets (e.g. 2 cells with pointers are lost within a sequence of eight cells) * When an "ATM start of structure" is received and a positive phase shift is detected lower than or equal to 2 octets, an equal number of octets is deleted in the Reassembly Buffer and the flag is reset. * When the detected phase shift is larger than the allowed value or negative the flag is reset and the Reassembly Buffer is re-initialized. * When no phase shift is detected the flag is reset. 4.4.2 Setup 4.4.2.1 Setup of Reassembly Channels Each AAL transmit channel can be configured in the "channel_mode" field of the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" to operate in "Inactive", "Standby" or "Active" mode. Data Sheet 62 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description * In "Inactive" mode, no cells are accepted from the "UTOPIA Transmit interface", and byte-pattern 0 is sent to the framer transmit interface. * In "Standby" mode, cells are accepted from the "UTOPIA Transmit interface", but bytepattern 0 is sent to the framer transmit interface. * In "Active" mode, cells are accepted from the "UTOPIA Transmit interface", and user data octets are sent to the framer transmit interface. When activating the AAL reassembly channels, it is important to follow the initialization sequence as shown in Table 19. Step 2 must be held at least 250 s to internally reset the AAL channel. During this time the device connected to the Framer Transmit Interface has to be in normal operation allowing the IWE8 to synchronize itself on the frame pulse. Table 19 Activation sequence for AAL reassembly channels Step pcfN. p_tx_act AAL Transmit Reference Slot. channel_mode 1 0 = inactive 00 = Inactive 2 1 = active 00 = Inactive 3 1 = active 01 or 11 = Active 4.4.2.2 Minimum Time 250 s Physical Reassembly Buffer Size Based on the cell filling level, AAL type and use of SDT, a memory block can be divided into subblocks, where the user data octets of a single cell are stored. The size of the memory subblock per Reassembly Buffer is automatically adapted. Table 20 shows this relationship. Table 20 Relationship betw. Cell Filling and Reassembly Buffer Subblock Size Cell Filling AAL0 (octets) Cell Filling AAL1, no SDT (octets) Cell Filling AAL1, with SDT (octets) Octets per block Cells per block Octets per cell 33-48 32-47 31-47 64 1 64 17-32 16-31 15-30 64 2 32 9-16 8-15 7-14 64 4 16 4-8 4-7 4-6 64 8 8 The physical Reassembly Buffer size used for a N x 64 kbit/s connection is given by: Physical Size(octets) = N x 8 x Cell Filling x Cells per Block. Data Sheet 63 [3] 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.4.2.3 Initialization of the Reassembly Buffer Before a channel is activated, the Reassembly Buffer must be configured properly to compensate Cell Delay Variation (CDV). In order to avoid buffer underflow due to large cell distances the amount of initial starvation octets that are passed to the framer interface upon arrival of the first cell needs to be set. On the other hand this number needs to be as small as possible to avoid excessive delay. The logical Reassembly Buffer size can be adjusted in order to detect too small cell distances by Reassembly Buffer overflow. All parameters are defined in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3. The amount of starvation octets given to the framer transmit interface after arrival of the first cell is defined by "starv_ini". The contents of the starvation octets can be defined by "starv_bpslct" and the logical Reassembly Buffer size can be configured with "buff_lsize". The following sections give an overview on the Reassembly Buffer operation and initialization. Unstructured Data Transfer: After activation of a channel both SAR Receiver and Framer Transmit Interface start operation. As long as no reassembled cell is available in the Reassembly Buffer it is considered to be in underflow condition and starvation octets are passed to the Framer Transmit Interface. As soon as the first reassembled cell is available in the Reassembly Buffer the device starts building up the Reassembly Buffer threshold level. This is done by passing an additional amount of starvation octets to the framer Transmit Interface Reassembly Buffer Filling Level [octets] buff_lsize Example: part_fill = 16 octets N = 16 no CDV 4 0 Time Time Framer Interf. T0 T0+TS Starvation octets Data octets T0+T T0+2*T T0: First cell arrival time TS: (starv_ini+1) * 125s / N T: Average cell distance Reassembly Buffer no CDV Figure 15 Data Sheet Reassembly Buffer Initialization: No CDV 64 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description As the transmission of the reassembled cell stream is delayed by "starv_ini"+1 octets, there will be "starv_ini"+1 octets of the previous cell left in the Reassembly Buffer if the following cell arrives without CDV. If the maximum positive CDV is the same as the maximum negative CDV the expectation interval has a length of 2 x CDV. Assuming N octets of data are transmitted within one frame period of 125s the amount of data transmitted in this interval is: N = 2 x CDV x --------------125s [4] The worst case for buffer underflow is given if the first cell has maximum positive CDV. Reassembly Buffer Filling Level [octets] Example: part_fill = 16 octets; N = 16 1st cell has max. pos. CDV = 15,625s 2nd cell has max. neg. CDV = -15,625s buff_lsize 4 Time 0 Time Framer Interf. T0 T0-CDV+TS T0-CDV Starvation octets Data octets Figure 16 T0+T T0+T+CDV T0: First cell arrival time (theoretical) TS: (starv_ini + 1) * 125s / N T: Average cell distance T0+2*T T0+2*T-CDV Reassembly Buffer pos CDV Reassembly Buffer Initialization: positive CDV at Start Up In this case the amount of starvation octets inserted after receipt of the first cell has to be bigger than the amount of data transmitted during the expectation interval. Otherwise the Reassembly Buffer will enter underflow condition at any time a cell with maximum positive CDV is followed by a cell with maximum negative CDV. N starvini - 1 = 2 x CDV x --------------- - 1 0 125s [5] The worst case for buffer overflow is given if the first cell has maximum negative CDV and then any cell with maximum negative CDV is followed by a cell with maximum positive CDV. Data Sheet 65 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description Reassembly Buffer Filling Level [octets] buff_lsize Example: part_fill = 16 octets; N = 16 1st cell has max. neg. CDV = 15,625s 2nd cell has max. pos. CDV = -15,625s 4 Time 0 Time Framer Interf. T0+T T0+CDV+TS T0+T-CDV T0+CDV T0: First cell arrival time (theoretical) TS: (starv_ini + 1) * 125s / N Starvation octets Data octets T: Average cell distance Figure 17 T0 T0+2*T T0+2*T+CDV Reassembly Buffer neg CDV Reassembly Buffer Initialization: Negative CDV at Start Up If the first cell has maximum negative CDV there will be "starv_ini" + 1 octets left in the Reassembly Buffer when the following cell arrives with maximum negative CDV. In case the following cell arrives with maximum positive CDV it will be "starv_ini" + 1 plus the amount of data to be transmitted in the expectation interval. Just after cell arrival the filling level of the Reassembly Buffer is at its maximum: N bufflsize partfill + starvini + 1 + = partfill + 4 x CDV x --------------125s [6] The delay introduced by the Reassembly Buffer is: starvini x 125s delay = -----------------------------------------N [7] Structured Data Transfer: After activation of a channel both SAR Receiver and Framer Transmit Interface start operation. As long as no reassembled cell in P format is accepted the Reassembly Buffer it is considered to be in underflow condition and starvation octets are passed to the Framer Transmit Interface. After that, "starv_ini" + 1 starvation octets are given to the Framer Transmit Interface. Then, the transmitter reads as many octets from the Reassembly Buffer as indicated by the pointer field. For each octet one starvation octet is given to the Framer Transmit Interface. The next octet to be read from the Reassembly Buffer is the "ATM Start of Structure" (The octet where the AAL1 pointer field points at). Data Sheet 66 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description After that, starvation octets are passed to the Framer Transmit Interface until the "Port Start of Structure" is detected. A "Port Start of Structure" occurs when the Framer Transmit Interface requests the first time-slot octet belonging to the channel in the frame or the multiframe. From that moment on, the "ATM Start of Structure" and "Port Start of Structure" are synchronous and the contents of the Reassembly Buffer are passed to the framer transmit interface. The worst case for buffer underflow is given, if the first cell has maximum positive CDV, the contents of the pointer field is "0" and the "Port Start of Structure" occurs right after the transmission of "starv_ini" + 1 starvation octets. Example: part_fill = 16 octets; N = 16 1st cell has max. pos. CDV = 15,625s 2nd cell has max. neg. CDV = -15,625s Reassembly Buffer Filling Level [octets] buff_lsize 4 Time 0 Time Framer Interf. T0+T T0 T0-CDV+TS T0-CDV T0+T+CDV T0+2*T T0+2*T-CDV Port Start of Structure ATM Start of Structure Starvation octets Data octets Figure 18 T0: First cell arrival time (theoretical) TS: (starv_ini + 1) * 125s / N T: Average cell distance Reassembly Buffer pos CDV structur Reassembly Buffer Initialization for SDT: positive CDV at Start Up In this case the amount of starvation octets inserted after receipt of the first P format cell has to be bigger than the amount of data transmitted during the expectation interval as defined in (4). Otherwise the Reassembly Buffer will enter underflow condition at any time a cell with maximum positive CDV is followed by a cell with maximum negative CDV. 2 x CDV x N starvini - 1 = --------------------------------- - 1 0 125s [8] The worst case for buffer overflow is given, if the first P format cell has maximum negative CDV, the contents of the pointer field is at its maximum value Pmax and the "Port Start of Structure" occurs right before the receipt of that P format cell. In that case the complete frame needs to be stored in the Reassembly Buffer Data Sheet 67 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description If the first cell has maximum negative CDV there will be "starv_ini" + 1 octets left in the Reassembly Buffer at any time a cell with maximum positive CDV is followed by a cell with maximum negative CDV. the following cell arrives with maximum negative CDV. In case the following cell arrives with maximum positive CDV it will be "starv_ini" + 1 plus the amount of data to be transmitted in the expectation interval. Just after cell arrival the filling level of the Reassembly Buffer is at its maximum: To allow CDV compensation and SDT structure synchronization, the logical size should be programmed to a minimum value given by: bufflsize partfill + starvini + 1 + + FR x N + Pmax [9] N bufflsize partfill + 4 x CDV x --------------- + FR x N + Pmax 125s [10] with FR being the number of frames in a structure: FR = 0: when SDT is not used FR = 1: for frame based SDT FR = 16: for multi-frame based SDT in E1 mode FR = 24: for multi-frame based SDT in T1 mode Pmax is the maximum number of payload octets from the pointer field to the start of structure: Pmax = N x FR, if N x FR < 2 x part_fill Pmax = 2 x part_fill, if N x FR > 2 x part_fill The logical Reassembly Buffer size is limited by its physical size. The relation is given by: bufflsize 8 x N x partfill x cellsperblock - S x partfill [11] where S = 0: in case of Fast Sequence Count Algorithm S = 1: in case of Robust Sequence Count Algorithm When the robust SC algorithm is used, the decision on cell acceptance is delayed until the next cell is received. As the cell is temporarily stored in the Reassembly Buffer, there must always be space for that cell. Therefore, the physical size of the Reassembly Buffer must be at least the logical size plus one cell. In the fast SC algorithm the intermediate storage of a cell is not required. The cell is stored immediately in the Reassembly Buffer, when accepted. The delay introduced by the Reassembly Buffer is: starvini x 125s ( starvini + FR x N + P max ) x 125s ------------------------------------------ delay --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N N Data Sheet 68 [12] 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.4.2.4 Re-Initialization of the Reassembly Buffer For re-initialization of the Reassembly Buffer by the microprocessor, the processor has to set the "mcp_reinit" bit in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM2, wait for 1.5 frames and reset "mcp_reinit". Data Sheet 69 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.5 Internal Clock Recovery Circuit (ICRC) The Internal Clock Recovery Circuit (ICRC) may generate RTS values in upstream direction and a 8.192, 2.048 or 1.544 MHz transmit clock in downstream direction. Each port works independently using its own set of control registers and error counters. The Cell delay variation is assumed to be less than +/- 4 ms. According to ITU-T 432.1 [33] SRTS clock recovery is only defined for unstructured CES. Therefore, ports supporting SRTS clock recovery have to be configured for only one channel in unstructured CES with completely filled ATM cells. The ICRC supports two Framer Interface formats * FALC Mode (FAM, see Chapter 5.1.1) with a transmit clock frequency of 8.192 MHz for both E1 and T1. * Generic Interface Mode (GIM, see Chapter 5.1.2) with a transmit clock frequency of 2.048 MHz in case of E1 and 1.544 MHz in case of T1. These modes can be selected via bits "om" in the Operation Mode Register (opmo, see Chapter 7.24) and bit "gim" in the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit Configuration Register ("icrcconf", see Chapter 7.46). Transmit clocks are generated by internal PLLs based on SRTS, ACM or both. The method of transmit clock generation is selected via bits "srt" and "acm" in the Configuration Register Downstream of Port N ("condN", see Chapter 7.47). Generation of RTS values is enabled via bit "rtsg" in the Configuration Register Upstream of Port N ("conuN", see Chapter 7.51). If ACM is used, the corresponding RTS generator can be kept disabled. For communication between the ICRC and the rest of the chip a frame based protocol is used. The internal interface as well as its protocol is the same as defined for the external clock recovery interface (see Chapter 5.4). The ICRC contains the following sub blocks: Data Sheet 70 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description Receive Line Clock RTS generation lgc 2.43 MHz 32.768 MHz Transmit Line Clock lpcr RTS 0 1 1 0 lc8 rtsi 0 Loopback11 0 1 RTS Transmit FIFO Frame Generator ena ena PLL SRTS PLL FILTER 0 1 lptu Frame Receiver 1 rtso RTS Receive FIFO 1 0 Clock lprd lpru Recovery Interface 0 SDI 1 0 1 SDOR PDSYN 1 0 RTS Frame Buffer Filling Receiver 2 lgs PLL ACM (ACM) PLL Microprocessor Interface, Test and Control 2.43 MHz Fractional Divider 1 0 SDOD lptd SCLK CLK52 RFCLK Bdoti Figure 19 4.5.1 Block Diagram of the ICRC Data Flow In transmit direction the ICRC generates RTS values for each port independently and writes them into the RTS Transmit FIFO. Received RTS values are written to the port specific RTS Receive FIFO to compensate cell delay variation. RTS values for each port are processed at a frequency equal to the SRTS period (8 cells). ACM values are processed immediately by the corresponding PLL. 4.5.2 Frame Generator This block generates 32-bit control frames that are used for communication with the rest of the system. For synchronization with the system the received synchronization signal PDSYN is used. However, if this signal can't be extracted from the received bit stream by the frame receiver, the frames are generated by means of an internal synchronization counter. The frame output is put in tristate during power down of the internal interface. As soon as the internal synchronization counter is synchronized on PDSYN signal, the frame output is enabled. Data Sheet 71 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.5.3 Frame Receiver This block is implemented twice. Once for SRTS and ACM data via port SDOD and once for the "reset SRTS logic" command via port SDOR. The frame receiver is synchronized to the received synchronization signal PDSYN by means of an internal synchronization counter. In case no sync signal is received, frames are synchronized to the counter. The synchronization between PDSYN and the internal counter is checked each time PDSYN is received. A synchronization error is indicated via bit "scri" in the Interrupt Source Register ("irs", see Chapter 7.44) at the start of a series of wrong synchronized frames. Synchronization errors are counted and the internal synchronization counter is synchronized on the new received synchronization pulse. An errored frame (parity error) is indicated via bit "per" in "irs" but processed as a normal frame. In case the internal interface to the ICRC is switched off by the system, SCLK keeps working. The ICRC detects the following errors: * Parity error: Because SDOD and SDOR are continuously high, the odd parity is violated. * Synchronization error: Because PDSYN is continuously low, synchronization is not possible. For ACM, the Reassembly Buffer filling level is measured in number of octets and passed to the ICRC each time a accepted cell is stored in the Reassembly Buffer. The arrival time between 2 ACM data values is verified. The assumed maximum CDV is 4 ms. The maximum cell distance without CDV is 0.276 ms for T1 and 0.221 ms for E1. In case the next ACM data value is not arrived within 10 ms, an error indicated in register "atlN" is generated. 4.5.4 RTS Receive FIFO This block is implemented for each port. The RTS Receive FIFO compensates the Cell Delay Variation (CDV), the delay of the system interface with it's FIFO and the phase difference between reading and writing of the RTS Receive FIFO. Each RTS Receive FIFO provides space for 8 RTS values. After reaching the initial filling level of 5 RTS values, delay variations of +3 / -5 RTS values can be compensated. This corresponds to a maximum CDV of -4.4 / +7.3 ms (E1) or 5.8 / +9.7 ms (T1). In case of overflow (register "sroN") or underflow (register "sruN") the PLL-SRTS is put in free running mode and the FIFO is restarted. These events are indicated in the SRTS Receive FIFO Underflow Register (sruN, see Chapter 7.60) and the SRTS Receive FIFO Overflow Register (sroN, see Chapter 7.61). Data Sheet 72 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description In case of SRTS the PLL start-up is delayed until 5 RTS values are received. This will take 7.3 ms for E1 and 9.7 ms for T1. During this time PLL-SRTS is free running (and bit "frr" of register "statN" is set). If the PLL block does not use RTS values (bit "srt"=0 in register "condN") or the port is in power down mode (bit "pwd"=1 in register "condN") no data is written to this FIFO. In case bit "ena" of register "tsinN" is set, a value from the SRTS Receive FIFO is read by reading register "tsout". In cases where the network clocks of RTS generator and RTS receiver have a frequency offset, the SRTS algorithm will generate a service frequency with the same frequency offset. The rate of RTS value generation and consumption depends on the service clocks. In this special case, the rate of RTS value consumption is different from the rate of RTS value generation. Enabling the ACM algorithm will not help as the FIFO is read by the clock generated by PLL-SRTS. As a result the SRTS Receive FIFO will generate regular (every 20 minutes) under- or overflows. 4.5.5 RTS Transmit FIFO Each RTS generator stores the RTS value and its port number in the RTS Transmit FIFO. When the frame generator starts generating a new frame, it reads from the FIFO the source address and the next RTS value. 4.5.6 ICRC Loopback Modes Loopbacks are available for each port and for the system interface of the circuit. Each port has 2 loopbacks. The first, situated near the framer, performs a loopback on the clock signals. It is controlled by the bit "lgc" in the Configuration Register Downstream Direction of Port N (condN, see Chapter 7.47), which sends the generated clock back to the RTS generator, and "lc8" in "condN", which sends the received clock back to the framer interface. The second has the same internal structure. It allows to send received RTS values of all ports back to the RTS Transmit FIFO ("lpcr"=1 in register "condN"). Thus, this loop has a variable delay with a guaranteed maximum of RTS Transmit FIFO depth x Frame-period. If "lgs"=1 in register "condN", generated RTS values are sent via the receive FIFO to the PLL. Another loopback block is situated at the clock recovery interface. It is controlled by the bits "lptd", "lptu", "lprd" and "lpru" in the ICRC configuration register "icrcconf". Not all loop back possibilities of this block carry useful data, but the parity can always be tested. 4.5.7 RTS Injection In case bit "ena" of the Test Input of Port N register (tsinN, see Chapter 7.50) is set, the RTS Transmit FIFO receives a new RTS value from field "rtsi" of "tsinN" at the moment the microprocessor writes data to that register. RTS values coming from the RTS generator of port N are ignored in this case. RTS values coming from the clock recovery Data Sheet 73 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description interface and which have to be returned because of loopback "lpcr", have priority over register "tsinN". During this test, the clock recovery or, in case of loopback, the receive FIFO receives the RTS values written in field rtsi. It is advisable to power down the circuit(s) which do not work properly with these RTS values via bit "pwd" of "condN". If "srt" in "condN" is reset, the output of the RTS Receive FIFO is not used by PLL-SRTS. 4.5.8 Fractional Divider The fractional divider generates a 2.43 MHz clock from the 51.84 MHz clock provided via the CLK52 pin. This is done by selecting 3 out of 64 clock pulses of 51.84 MHz. The resulting 2.43 MHz clock contains jitter components of 810 kHz and above, with a maximum peak to peak jitter of 19 ns. 4.5.9 Clocks For an overview on the required clocks for the ICRC please refer to Chapter 8.1. 4.5.10 Power Management Different Power down modes are available for the ICRC: * for each port via bit "pwd" in "condN" * for the Clock Recovery Interface via bit "pdcri" in "icrcconf". * for the complete ICRC by means of the "a_icrc_dwn" bit in the "acfg". This feature reduces the power consumption by approximately 50 mW. Once the ICRC is switched off, it can only be enabled by hardware reset of the whole device. 4.5.11 PLL Block This block is implemented for each port. It consists of 3 PLLs: PLL-SRTS, PLL-ACM and PLL-FILTER. The bits "srt" and "acm" in the register "condN" define, which PLL is connected to PLLFILTER and used for clock recovery. Each PLL may be used exclusively or in combination. 4.5.11.1 PLL-SRTS: PLL-SRTS is used for clock recovery using the SRTS method. It has a cut-off frequency of 20 to 50 Hz. The phase detector of PLL-SRTS has a linear range which optimized for jitter tolerance requirements. It is defined by a "window" of accepted RTS values. Each time PLL-SRTS detects values, which fall out of the window, or processes invalid values, it is forced in hold over for 1 SRTS period, bit "hov" of register "statN" is set and the Data Sheet 74 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description SRTS Invalid Value Processed Counter ("sriN", see Chapter 7.63) is incremented. In case the number of out of window conditions during 16 SRTS periods exceeds the value given by field "tr_srts" of register "treshN", an out of lock message, indicated with bit "ols" of register "oolN" is generated. During start-up of the RTS Receive FIFO, PLL-SRTS is free running and bit "frr" of register "statN" is set. 4.5.11.2 PLL-FILTER The PLL "PLL-FILTER" has a very low cut off frequency and a tuning range of 240 ppm. It reduces jitter which is generated in, or passed through PLL-SRTS. Although PLLFILTER is placed behind PLL-ACM, it has little or no functionality in case of ACM, as PLL-ACM has a lower cut off frequency. If more out of lock detections during 16 SRTS periods are detected than defined with "tr_filt" in "tresh", an out of lock message, indicated by bit "olf" of register "oolN", is generated. 4.5.11.3 PLL-ACM The PLL-ACM is a control system with feedback of 2nd order. Its phase is adjusted according to the filling level of the Reassembly Buffer. The average buffer filling level as defined in bits "avb" in the Average Buffer Filling Register ("avbN", see Chapter 7.52) is subtracted from the current buffer filling level. The result is amplified in order to adjust the cut off frequency and to define the system's damping (number of bytes, needed to drive the DCO over its tuning range. The loop gain is programmed in the ACM Shift Factor Register (asfN, see Chapter 7.53). Although adjustable, the PLL-cut-off frequency is generally less than 1 Hz. In conjunction with a low pass filter, CDV is very small. The behavior of the PLL is characterized by rise time and lock in time. The rise time is the time when the clock output enters the predefined tuning range for the first time. The lock in time is defined as the time after which the clock stays within the accepted deviation. Data Sheet 75 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description f/f0 2d Mp 1 0.9 Tr, Tr1: Rise time Tp: Peak time Tl: Lock in time Mp: Peak overshoot 2d: Tuning range f 0: Target frequency 0.1 Tr1 Tr Tl Tp t ACM Transient Parameters Figure 20 Transient Parameters The tuning range of the DCO is limited to the value programmed to bits "tur" in register "condN". If the phase detector requests a higher frequency deviation the DCO enters out-of-range condition. In this case the DCO's output will be clipped and bit "max" of register "statN" will be set. If the number of out-of-range conditions during 16 ATM cells exceeds the value given by field "tr_acm" of register "treshN", an out-of-lock message, indicated via field "ola" of register "oolN", is generated. Increasing the loop-gain reduces the damping of the PLL-ACM. This will reduce the rise time but results in overshoot and long lock-in times. Reducing the loop-gain increases the damping. This results in lower cut off frequencies, and prevents overshoot. Thus, CDV is less likely to drive the PLL out of lock. The rise and lock-in time are increased. If the loop-gain is too low, the amount of bytes required to drive the DCO over it's tuning range could cause a data buffer over- or underflow. Optimized damping allows minimum lock-in time without overshoot. In this case PLLACM's frequency is moving asymptotically to the correct value. Data Sheet 76 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description f/f0 dl dl: low damping dh: high damping do: optimized damping do 1 dh 0.1 Tr(dl) Tr(do) = Tl(do) Tr(dh) = Tl(dh) t ACM Edge response Figure 21 Influence of Damping on Lock in Time PLL-ACM tries to keep the number of bytes in the Reassembly Buffer at the average buffer filling value programmed to register "avbN". This value should be equivalent to the number of bytes stored in the Reassembly Buffer during start-up, as defined by the value programmed in the "starv_ini" field of the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3. During start-up and restart, PLL-ACM will be free running for 8 x tiniN[tini] x TData as programmed in the Time of Initial Free Run Register ("tiniN", see Chapter 7.54). During this time the data buffer is filled with an initial number of bytes. As tiniN[tini] is 2 bit longer than "stav_ini" in the AAL Transmit Reference Slot of RAM3 it is possible to choose a longer-than-necessary initialization time, to compensate start-up time differences. After the initial free run, PLL-ACM will start locking in. The lock in time depends on: * The difference between the initial number of bytes in the data buffer (see "starv_ini" of the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3) and the value programmed in register "avbN". * The damping, which is influenced by register "asfN". * The maximum allowed frequency deviation given by "tur" of register "condN". * The required frequency deviation. Data Sheet 77 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description During this lock-in process, the output frequency might temporarily reach the programmed minimum or maximum value. This strongly depends on the initial difference of the data buffer filling from the value given by "avbN". As re-initialization of the data buffer is not reported to the ICRC, PLL-ACM will detect a huge difference between data buffer filling and the value given by "avbN". As a result the output frequency will be driven to it's lowest allowed value and stays there for a relative long period of time. For this reason it is important to program the field "tur" in register "condN" with the smallest possible value. 4.5.11.4 SRTS with ACM: The combination of SRTS and ACM is used when the derived network clock of the SRTS generator differs from the derived network clock of the SRTS receiver. The maximum difference is relatively small (+/-4.6 ppm) and should be compensated by ACM. In this case the shifting of the difference between ACM data and register "avbN", as programmed in register "asfN", has to be reduced. Stable operation of PLL-ACM in parallel with PLL-SRTS can not be guaranteed if the shifting is not reduced. The cut off frequency of PLL-ACM has to be much lower than the cut off frequency of PLL-SRTS, as these PLLs are working in parallel in this case. This will also reduce the effects of CDV, because the cut off frequency of PLL-ACM is reduced. The tuning range (register "condN", field "tur") can not be reduced as PLL-ACM has to compensate jitter which is generated by or passed through PLL-SRTS. Data Sheet 78 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.6 Internal Queues 4.6.1 Event Queue All the functional blocks that process octets or cells can generate counter events, i.e. commands to increment a particular counter in the external RAM. All counter events are written in a FIFO queue that can store 256 counter events. A counter event contains the statistics counter address in external RAM and an increment value. 4.6.2 Output Queue When a cell is completely stored in the ATM Receive or Segmentation Buffer, it is ready to be transmitted to the ATM layer over the UTOPIA receive interface. The external RAM address of the cell is stored in a common Output Queue (OQ). The Output Queue is a First In First Out (FIFO) queue with a maximum of 256 cell address entries. It is common to ATM and AAL mode ports. As long as the Output Queue is not empty, the Cell Receive processing (CR) will write the corresponding cell from external RAM to the UTOPIA Receive interface (UR). 4.6.3 Interrupt Queue The Interrupt Queue in external RAM is handled as a FIFO which is written whenever a counter reaches its threshold value. When there are interrupts in the Interrupt Queue, the "iq_ne" bit in the interrupt status register 1 "isr1" will be set to 1. When the corresponding bit is not masked in the "imr1" register an interrupt will be generated on the MPIR1 pin. The microprocessor should react on the interrupt by reading the Interrupt Queue. When "oam_act" is set to 1, the MPADR(12:1) address bits are don't care. The next Interrupt Queue entry will automatically be provided. Each Interrupt Queue entry identifies a particular OAM counter that has reached its threshold value. The counter is identified by its "port_nr", "channel_nr" and "counter_nr". When the microprocessor reads the counter value and the "dest_read" bit of the register oamc is set to 1, the counter is automatically reset. Each Interrupt Queue entry also indicates whether there are still more interrupts in the queue in the "iq_ne" field of the interrupt status register "isr1". This allows the software to read the Interrupt Queue until it is empty without having to read the interrupt status register "isr1" again. When the statistics function is disabled (oamc[oam_act] = 0), the P can read and write all addresses of the Interrupt Queue. Data Sheet 79 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.7 OAM Processing The OAM processing block (OM) will read Statistics Counter events from the Event Queue as long as the Event Queue is not empty. The OM will read the Statistics Counter value "count_value" and the Statistics Counter threshold from external RAM. If the Statistics Counter is not yet at its maximum value 4000 0000H, the value is increased with the increment value given by the counter event. If the Statistics Counter threshold is active ("thres_act" = 1) and the Statistics Counter equals or exceeds the threshold value "thres_value", the OM block will write an interrupt entry in the Interrupt Queue in external RAM. The new Statistics Counter value with indication whether an interrupt was generated in the "int_gen" field will finally be written into external RAM. The "dest_read" bit determines whether a read operation from the microprocessor in the Statistics Counter address space in external RAM causes a reset of the Statistics Counter value. The OM block can be disabled via bit "oam_act" in the OAM control register ("oamc", see Chapter 7.3). In normal operation, counter event processing should be activated (oam_act = 1). In this case the microprocessor can only read indirectly in the Interrupt Queue. For RAM test and initialization, the "oam_act" should be set to 0. In this mode, the microprocessor can write and read the complete external RAM. The use of the Statistics Counter thresholds allows the software to reduce the number of generated interrupts and to decide at what error level an interrupt should be generated. When the software wants to use polling mode, the thresholds can be made inactive, and no interrupts will be generated. The software will read all the Statistics Counters on regular time intervals in this mode. A combination of both methods is also possible, all the Statistics Counters are read and reset on regular time intervals. However thresholds can be used as an extra guard: a Statistics Counter that reaches an exceptionally high value will cause an interrupt. For a detailed list of all implemented Statistics Counters refer to Chapter 6.2.1. For information how to translate Statistics Counters into the ATM Forum CES MIB as defined in [10] refer to Chapter 8.2. Data Sheet 80 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.8 Loopback Modes 4.8.1 Upstream Loop The Upstream Loop block (UL) allows cells that are received at the Framer Interface and forwarded to the UTOPIA Receive Interface to be send back via the UTOPIA Transmit Interface to the Transmitter Interface. The UL block contains a buffer of 4 ATM cells. To activate the Upstream Loop, the "p_ulp" bit in the Port Configuration Register (pcfN, see Chapter 7.1) must be set to 1. When a cell is available in the UL buffer, the UTOPIA transmit interface will de-assert the TXCLAV signal, to prevent the ATM layer component from sending cells during the processing of the loopback cell. For ATM mode ports, all cells are looped regardless of their header. The loop is always transparent allowing looped cells to be visible on the UTOPIA receive interface. For AAL mode ports, it is possible to make a single channel loop using a VCI filter. When the "vci_flt_ulp" bit in the Loopback Control Register (lpbc, see Chapter 7.11) is set to 0 all cells are looped. When the bit is set to 1, only those cells with the 5 LSB bits of the VCI matching the "vci_val_ulp" field of the "lpbc" register will be looped. Loopback can be switched from transparent to non-transparent by setting the "tulp" bit in the "lpbc" register. If the loopback is non-transparent, looped cells are not visible on the UTOPIA receive interface. 4.8.2 Downstream Loop It is possible to loop ATM cells that are coming in on the UTOPIA transmit interface to the UTOPIA receive interface through the Downstream Loop (DL) block. The DL block contains a buffer of 4 ATM cells. When a cell is available in the DL buffer and in the Output Queue, the UTOPIA receive interface will transmit cells from both buffers with alternating priority. To activate the downstream UTOPIA loop, the "p_dlp" bit in the Port Configuration Register (pcfN, see Chapter 7.1) must be set to 1. When the downstream UTOPIA loopback is active for at least one port, the UTOPIA transmit interface will only assert the RxCLAV signal to 1 when a free space of one ATM cell is available in both the DL buffer and the UT input buffer. The loopback can be made transparent or non-transparent by setting the "tdlp" bit in the Loopback Control Register (lpbc, see Chapter 7.11). If the loopback is made nontransparent, the looped cells are not transferred to the "Cell Transmit Processing" block CT. Data Sheet 81 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.8.3 Serial Loop The framer transmit clock, data, framesync and multi-framesync signals can be looped from the Framer Transmit Interface to the Framer Receive Interface per port. This feature can be enabled by setting the "p_slp" bit in the Port Configuration Register (pcfN, see Chapter 7.1). The loopback can be made transparent or non-transparent by setting the "tslp" bit in the Loopback Control Register (lpbc, Chapter 7.11). If the loopback is made transparent, all transmitted data is also visible on FTDAT. Otherwise, if non-transparent, all 1s are transmitted on FTDAT. Data Sheet 82 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.9 Cell Insertion This block allows the insertion of predefined cells stored in the Cell Insertion Buffer into the UTOPIA receive cell stream. The Cell Insertion Buffer, located in external RAM, offers space for one ATM cell. The ATM cell except of the UDF octet needs to be written to the Cell Insertion Buffer via the Microprocessor interface. When transferring the cell to the UTOPIA receive interface an UDF of 00H will be inserted. Cell insertion is activated by setting the bit "insert_cell" in the Command Register ("cmd", see Chapter 7.31) the cell is then read from the Cell Insertion Buffer and forwarded to the UTOPIA Receive Interface. The port number is generated randomly. Depending on the UTOPIA mode selection, it will be mapped either on the UTOPIA address bus or in the ATM header ("mapping_mode" = 2, 3, 4 or 5 in register "utconf") overwriting the predefined values. Data Sheet 83 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.10 Cell Extraction Cells coming in downstream direction from the UTOPIA Transmit Interface can be extracted to the Cell Extraction Buffer instead of the Reassembly/ATM Transmit Buffer. The Cell Extraction Buffer offers space for 254 ATM cells. It is located in the external RAM. Incoming cells are written to the Extraction Buffer if * their VCI matches to a pattern predefined in the Cell Filter VCI Pattern 1 Register (cfvp1, see Chapter 7.26) where each bit of the VCI can be masked via the Cell Filter VCI Mask Register 1 (cfvm1, Chapter 7.27) * or their VCI matches to a pattern predefined in the Cell Filter VCI Pattern 2 Register (cfvp2, see Chapter 7.28) where each bit of the VCI can be masked via the Cell Filter VCI Mask Register 1 (cfvm1, Chapter 7.29) * or their PTI matches to one of two pattern defined in the Cell Filter Payload Type Register ("cfpt", see Chapter 7.30) each of these patterns can also be masked via "cfpt". Once a cell has been extracted to the cell Extraction Buffer, it is indicated by the bit "cf_fifo_n_empty" in the Extended Interrupt Status Register ("eis1", see Chapter 7.19). Cells can be read with the help of the read pointer ("rdptr") in the Cell Filter Read Pointer Register ("cfrp", Chapter 7.32). The rdptr can have values between 02H and FFH. This value is a pointer to the current base-address, at which the microprocessor can read the next extracted cell from the Extraction Buffer. MPADR = 26000H + 20H * rdptr [13] RMADR = 03000H + 10H * rdptr [14] After reading the cell the rdptr has to be incremented by the microprocessor and written back. If the rdptr is incremented to its maximum value FFH the value 02H has to be written back instead. Data Sheet 84 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description 4.11 Mapping of Channels to Timeslots The two LSB bits of a slot entry identify the slot type: Table 21 Coding of Slot Type in internal configuration RAMs Slot Type Bit 1 Bit 0 ATM/AAL Idle 0 0 ATM/AAL Continuation 1 0 ATM/AAL Reference X 1 4.11.1 ATM Mode The IWE8 supports any mapping scheme of ATM cells into N of the 32 timeslots of the framer interfaces. The mapping scheme is defined by programming 32 slot positions in the internal RAMs. RAM1 is used for receive port configuration and RAM2 for transmit port configuration. * For each configuration exactly one timeslot should be programmed as the "ATM Reference Slot". * Depending on the Link data rate 29 (E1) or 23 (T1) timeslots should be programmed as "ATM Continuation Slots". * The remaining unused slots should be programmed as "AAL Idle Slots". For mapping of ATM cells in T1/E1 frames according to ITU-T G.804 [26] the internal RAM slot positions should be programmed as shown in Table 22. Table 22 RAM RAM slot positions for ITU-T G.804 compliant ATM mapping E1 Slot Slot RAM Slot Type T1 in FAM Slot RAM Slot Type T1 in GIM Slot RAM Slot Type ATM Idle 1 ATM Continuation 0 0 ATM Idle 1 1 ATM Reference 1 ATM Reference 2 ATM Reference 2 2 ATM Continuation 2 ATM Continuation 3 ATM Continuation 3 3 ATM Continuation 3 ATM Continuation 4 ATM Continuation 4 4 ATM Continuation ATM Idle 5 ATM Continuation 5 5 ATM Continuation 4 ATM Continuation 6 ATM Continuation 6 6 ATM Continuation 5 ATM Continuation 7 ATM Continuation 7 7 ATM Continuation 6 ATM Continuation 8 ATM Continuation 8 8 ATM Continuation ATM Idle 9 ATM Continuation 9 9 ATM Continuation ATM Continuation 10 ATM Continuation Data Sheet 7 85 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description Table 22 RAM RAM slot positions for ITU-T G.804 compliant ATM mapping (cont'd) E1 T1 in FAM T1 in GIM Slot Slot RAM Slot Type Slot RAM Slot Type Slot RAM Slot Type 10 10 ATM Continuation 8 ATM Continuation 11 ATM Continuation 11 11 ATM Continuation 9 ATM Continuation 12 ATM Continuation 12 12 ATM Continuation ATM Idle 13 ATM Continuation 13 13 ATM Continuation 10 ATM Continuation 14 ATM Continuation 14 14 ATM Continuation 11 ATM Continuation 15 ATM Continuation 15 15 ATM Continuation 12 ATM Continuation 16 ATM Continuation 16 16 ATM Idle ATM Idle 17 ATM Continuation 17 17 ATM Continuation 13 ATM Continuation 18 ATM Continuation 18 18 ATM Continuation 14 ATM Continuation 19 ATM Continuation 19 19 ATM Continuation 15 ATM Continuation 20 ATM Continuation 20 20 ATM Continuation ATM Idle 21 ATM Continuation 21 21 ATM Continuation 16 ATM Continuation 22 ATM Continuation 22 22 ATM Continuation 17 ATM Continuation 23 ATM Continuation 23 23 ATM Continuation 18 ATM Continuation 24 ATM Continuation 24 24 ATM Continuation 25 25 ATM Continuation 26 26 27 ATM Idle ATM Idle 19 ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation 20 ATM Continuation ATM Idle 27 ATM Continuation 21 ATM Continuation ATM Idle 28 28 ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Idle 29 29 ATM Continuation 22 ATM Continuation ATM Idle 30 30 ATM Continuation 23 ATM Continuation ATM Idle 31 31 ATM Continuation 24 ATM Continuation ATM Idle However, it is possible to define other ATM cell mappings, e.g. ATM cells in less than 32 64 kbit/s channels. However, RAM slot 1 has always to be defined as Reference Slot. 4.11.2 AAL Mode 4.11.2.1 Unstructured CES For unstructured CES according to ATM-Forums CES Specification [10] there is only one channel per port. Therefore, the internal configuration RAMs 1 to 3 have only to be Data Sheet 86 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description programmed with one Reference Slot at RAM slot 0. This slot number is used to identify the channel ("channel_nr" = 0). 4.11.2.2 Structured CES For AAL ports with structured CES (Nx64 kbit/s) service, the timeslots are grouped into channels containing N of 32 timeslots. The mapping of the N x 64 kbit/s channels into an T1/E1 frame is done by programming the 32 positions of the internal configuration RAMs (RAM1 for receive ports, RAM2 and RAM3 for transmit ports). It is possible to define more than one channel of N timeslots within one frame. In this case each channel has its own reference slot, followed by N-1 continuation slots. Additional unused frame slots that do not belong to any channel should be programmed as "AAL Idle Slot". The timeslot in the group of N timeslots with the lowest frame slot number is called the reference slot. The corresponding frame slot position in the internal RAM should be programmed as an "AAL Reference Slot". The slot number of the AAL Reference Slot is used to identify the channel ("channel_nr"). The other frame slot positions of the channel should be programmed as "AAL Continuation Slots". The reference slot number, as defined by the "ref_slot_nr" field entry, is used to identify the channel the continuation slot belongs to. The N timeslots of a channel do not need to have consecutive frame slot numbers. They can be deliberately chosen out of the 32 frame slots. Table 23 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES in AAL mode Slot number E1 T1 in FAM T1 in GIM 0 AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 1 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 2 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 3 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 4 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 5 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 6 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 7 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 8 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 9 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 10 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 11 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 12 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle Data Sheet 87 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description Table 23 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES in AAL mode (cont'd) Slot number E1 T1 in FAM T1 in GIM 13 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 14 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 15 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 16 AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 17 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 18 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 19 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 20 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 21 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 22 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 23 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 24 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle 25 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 26 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 27 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 28 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle 29 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 30 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 31 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle The channel mapping can be dynamically reconfigured without disturbing other active channels of the same port. Note: If frame based SDT without CAS is used and filling level 45, the condition band_width part_fill has to be fulfilled for correct operation. Multiframe based SDT without CAS should not be used. 4.11.2.3 Structured CES with CAS If a port is used for structured CES with CAS, additional signalling is inserted into the channel overhead. The associated RAM slots, 0 in T1 mode and RAM slots 0 and 16 in E1 mode, need to be configured as reference slots with "sdt_mfs" = 1. Please note, that all settings of the AAL Reference Slot refer to the channel payload. Therefore, in case of T1 mode in FAM or E1 mode the channel has to be set to inactive ("channel_mode" = 0) with no bandwidth assigned ("band_width" = 0). Data Sheet 88 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description In T1 mode in GIM things are different. RAM slot 0 may also be used for user data, with "channel_mode" and "band_width" set according to the requirements of the user data carried via that slot. Table 24 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES with CAS in AAL mode Slot number E1 T1 in FAM 0 AAL Reference "channel_mode" = 0 "band_width" = 0 "sdt_mfs" = 1 AAL Reference AAL Reference "channel_mode" = 0 "sdt_mfs" = 1 "band_width" = 0 "sdt_mfs" = 1 1 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 2 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 3 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 4 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 5 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 6 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 7 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 8 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 9 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 10 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 11 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 12 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 13 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 14 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 15 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 16 AAL Reference AAL Idle "channel_mode" = 0 "band_width" = 0 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 17 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 18 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 19 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 20 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 21 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 22 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle Data Sheet 89 T1 in GIM 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Operational Description Table 24 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES with CAS in AAL mode Slot number E1 T1 in FAM T1 in GIM 23 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle 24 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle 25 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 26 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 27 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 28 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle 29 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 30 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle 31 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle Data Sheet 90 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5 Interface Description 5.1 Generic Framer Interface The selection of the Echo Canceller mode is done via an external pin (Pin EC = 0). In standard mode (Pin EC = 1), 4 sub modes can be selected via the "om" bits in the Operation Mode Register ("opmo", see Chapter 7.24) * * * * FALC mode (FAM) Generic Interface mode (GIM) Synchronous mode with an external reference clock of 8 MHz (SYM8) Synchronous mode with an external reference clock of 2 MHz (SYM2) Depending on the level of the E1/T1 pin FAM and GIM can run based on E1 or T1 frames. SYM2 and SYM8 will always use E1 frame formats. A clock selector for the Framer transmit clock is integrated in the IWE8. Depending on bits "ftckn" in the FT Clock Select Register ("ftcs", see Chapter 7.25) selection between the following clocks is done: * the line clock FRCLK * the SRTS regenerated clock from internal or external clock recovery circuit * the clock derived from the external reference clock (pin RFCLK). The data on the Generic Framer Interface is structured in frames repeated every 125s. Each frame is divided into timeslots, where the least sigificant slot is transmitted first. The data bits in each slot are transmitted starting with the most significant bit. 5.1.1 FALC Mode (FAM) The IWE8 can be directly connected to Infineon's "Framer and Line interface components" (FALC) as shown in Figure 22. QuadFALCTM Figure 22 Data Sheet IWE8 SCLKR RDO SYPR RMFB FREEZE FRCLKn FRDATn FRFRSn FRMFBn FRLOSn XMFS SYPX XDI SCLKX FTMFSn FTFRSn FTDATn FTCKOn Coitf Connection of IWE8 to QuadFALC 91 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description The data is transferred between the FALC and the IWE8 via a system internal highway. FRCLK[7:0] Framer Receive Clock Receive system clock of 8.192 MHz (falling) FRDAT[7:0] Framer Receive Data FRDAT is sampled in the middle of the bit period on the falling edge of FRCLK FRMFB[7:0] Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits "p_ces" in "pcfN": 0= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe 1= Unstructured CES: Unused FRMFB is always sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK. If the framing is incorrect, the IWE8 stays in hunt mode. FRFRS[7:0] Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse FRFRS is generated at the beginning of timslot 1 of each frame FRLOS[7:0] Framer Receive Loss of Signalling FTCKO[7:0] Framer Transmit Clock depending on bits ftckn in ftcs: 00 = depending on bit "rts_eval" in "opmo": 0 = Transmit clock input with 8.192 MHz (falling) 1 = Clock of ICRC is used as transmit clock and is also switched to FTCKO pins (FTCKO is output pin) 01 = FRCLK ("rts_eval" = 1) 10 = Clock derived from RFCLK("rts_eval" = 1) 11 = No clock ("rts_eval" = 1) FTDAT[7:0] Framer Transmit Data FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of FTCKO: FTMFS[7:0] Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Depending on bit p_ces in pcfN: Data Sheet 92 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 0= Structured CES: Depending on "p_tx_mfs" in "pcfN": 0 = Double frame mode: FTMFS is asserted every 2 frames (250 s) 1= E1 CRC multiframe mode: FTMFS is asserted every 16 frames (2 ms) T1 mode: every 3 ms T1 superframe mode: every 1.5 ms 1= Unstructured CES: Unused, constant low level FTFRS[7:0] Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse FTFRS is generated at the beginning of timslot 1 of every frame RFCLK Reference Clock * Reference clock for the internal clock recovery circuit * Depending on p_rx_em in pcfN: Optional emergency clock if no transition on FRCLK is detected within 23 CLOCK cycles. The segmentation continues using the RFCLK divided by four, and using the byte-pattern programmed to a_emg_bpslct in acfg for the cell payload. The receive system clock and transmit system clock are both 8.192 MHz, and may be independent from each other. The data rate is 2048 Mbit/s. This means that each bit lasts for 4 clock cycles. Data on the system internal highway is structured in frames of 256 bits every 125 s. It is transmitted in 32 slots numbered from 0 to 31 with slot 0 transmitted first. The data bits of a slot are numbered from 1 to 8. The first transmitted bit `bit 1' is the most significant bit. Figure 23 shows the bit ordering. Data Sheet 93 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description Framer Receive Interface: FRCLKn FRDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FRMFBn FRFRSn timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1 Framer Transmit Interface: FTCKOn FTDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FTMFSn FTFRSn timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1 Fifam Figure 23 5.1.1.1 Framer Interface in FAM T1 FALC Mode In T1 mode (Pin E1/T1 = 0) there is one F-channel carrying the F-bit (Frame Alignment Signal/Data Link (FS/DL)) and 24 data channels numbered from 1 to 24. When using the QuadFALC in translation mode 0 (See QuadFALC data sheet) these channels are mapped into the 32 frame slots as shown in Table 25 . Table 25 Time slot Mapping in T1 Translation Mode 0 Frame slot T1 channel Frame slot 0 F channel (FS/DL) 16 1 channel 1 17 channel 13 2 channel 2 18 channel 14 3 channel 3 19 channel 15 4 T1 channel 20 5 channel 4 21 channel 16 6 channel 5 22 channel 17 7 channel 6 23 channel 18 8 Data Sheet 24 94 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description Table 25 Time slot Mapping in T1 Translation Mode 0 (cont'd) Frame slot T1 channel Frame slot T1 channel 9 channel 7 25 channel 19 10 channel 8 26 channel 20 11 channel 9 27 channel 21 12 28 13 channel 10 29 channel 22 14 channel 11 30 channel 23 15 channel 12 31 channel 24 The F-channel only contains the F-bit. Its location in the F channel is shown in Table 26. Table 26 F-Channel Format in T1 Mode MSB bit 1 F channel bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 LSB bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8 F-bit 5.1.1.2 E1 FALC Mode In E1 mode (Pin E1/T1 = 1) there are 32 channels numbered from 0 to 31. The channels are directly mapped into the corresponding 32 frame slots. 5.1.2 Generic Interface Mode (GIM) The Generic Interface Mode (GIM) makes the framer interface more universal, so that other framer/line interface units or T1/E1 transceivers can be connected directly to the IWE8. Depending on the E1/T1 pin, the interface can be adopted to line bit rates of 1.544 MHz (T1 rate) or 2.048 MHz (E1 rate). The mode is enabled by setting bit om = 01B in "opmo", see Chapter 7.24. Make sure that no clocks are applied to the transmitter when switching to GIM (FTCKOi has to be disconnected to ensure proper port function). 5.1.2.1 T1 Mode FRCLK[7:0] Framer Receive Clock Receive clock input at 1.544 MHz FRDAT[7:0] Framer Receive Data depending on bit "frri" in "opmo": 0= Data Sheet FRDAT is sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK 95 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 1= FRMFB[7:0] FRDAT is sampled with the rising edge of FRCLK Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits p_ces in pcfN: 0= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe 1= Unstructured CES: Unused, no constant level allowed Depending on bit "rfpp" in "opmo": 0= FRMFB is active low 1= FRMFB is active high FRMFB is always sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK. FRFRS[7:0] Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Permanently inactive FRLOS[7:0] Framer Receive Loss of Signalling FTCKO[7:0] Framer Transmit Clock depending on bits ftckn in ftcs: FTDAT[7:0] FTMFS[7:0] 00 = depending on bit "rts_eval" in "opmo": 0 = Transmit clock input with 1.544 MHz 1 = Clock of ICRC is used as transmit clock and is also switched to FTCKO pins (FTCKO is output pin) 01 = FRCLK 10 = Clock derived from RFCLK 11 = No clock Framer Transmit Data depending on bit "ftri" in "opmo": 0= FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of FTCKO 1= FTDAT is clocked with the rising edge of FTCKO Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Depending on bit p_ces in pcfN: 0= Data Sheet Structured CES: Depending on "p_tx_mfs" in "pcfN": 0 = Superframe frame mode: FTMFS is asserted every 12 frames (1.5 ms) 1 = Extended superframe mode: FTMFS is asserted every 24 frames (3 ms) 96 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 1= Unstructured CES: Inactive level Depending on bit "tfpp" in "opmo": 0= FTMFS is active low 1= FTMFS is active high FTFRS[7:0] Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse FTFRS is asserted synchronously to the transmission of the F-bit of each frame. RFCLK Reference Clock * Reference clock for the internal clock recovery circuit * Depending on p_rx_em in pcfN: Optional emergency clock if no transition on FRCLK is detected within 23 CLOCK cycles. The segmentation continues using the RFCLK divided by four, and using the byte-pattern programmed to a_emg_bpslct in acfg for the cell payload. Framer Receive Interface: FRCLKn FRDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 F B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FRMFBn timeslot 23 timeslot 0 timeslot 1 Framer Transmit Interface: FTCKOn FTDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 F B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FTMFSn FTFRSn timeslot 23 timeslot 0 timeslot 1 Figimt1 Figure 24 Data Sheet Framer Interface in GIM T1 97 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.1.2.2 E1 Mode FRCLK[7:0] Framer Receive Clock Receive clock input with 2.048 MHz FRDAT[7:0] Framer Receive Data depending on bit "frri" in "opmo" FRMFB[7:0] 0= FRDAT is sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK 1= FRDAT is sampled with the rising edge of FRCLK Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits p_ces in pcfN: 0= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe 1= Unstructured CES: Unused, no constant level allowed depending on bit "rfpp" in "opmo": 0= FRMFB is active low 1= FRMFB is active high FRMFB is always sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK. FRFRS[7:0] Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Permanently inactive FRLOS[7:0] Framer Receive Loss of Signalling FTCKO[7:0] Framer Transmit Clock depending on bits ftckn in ftcs: FTDAT[7:0] FTMFS[7:0] Data Sheet 00 = depending on bit "rts_eval" in "opmo": 0 = Transmit clock input with 2.048 MHz 1 = Clock of ICRC is used as transmit clock and is also switched to FTCKO pins (FTCKO is output pin) 01 = FRCLK 10 = Clock derived from RFCLK 11 = No clock Framer Transmit Data depending on bit "ftri" in "opmo": 0= FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of FTCKO 1= FTDAT is clocked with the rising edge of FTCKO Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization 98 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description Depending on bit p_ces in pcfN: 0= Structured CES: Depending on "p_tx_mfs" in "pcfN": 0 = Double frame mode: FTMFS is asserted every 2 frames (250 s) 1 = CRC multiframe mode: FTMFS is asserted every 16 frames (2 ms)) 1= Unstructured CES: Inactive level Depending on bit "tfpp" in "opmo": 0= FTMFS is active low 1= FTMFS is active high FTFRS[7:0] Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse FTFRS is asserted synchronously to the transmission of the first bit of the first timeslot of each frame. RFCLK Reference Clock * Reference clock for the internal clock recovery circuit * Depending on p_rx_em in pcfN: Optional emergency clock if no transition on FRCLK is detected within 23 CLOCK cycles. The segmentation continues using the RFCLK divided by four, and using the byte-pattern programmed to a_emg_bpslct in acfg for the cell payload. Framer Receive Interface: FRCLKn FRDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FRMFBn timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1 Framer Transmit Interface: FTCKOn FTDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FTMFSn FTFRSn timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1 Figime1 Figure 25 Data Sheet Framer Interface in GIM E1 99 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.1.3 Synchronous Modes (SYM) In these modes, transmit and receive channels are synchronized. Therefore, they may be used for synchronization of frame and multiframe based protocols, e.g. Frame based SDT on E1-Lines. Only one central clock, the external reference clock RFCLK, is used to clock the data on the different ports. Two synchronous modes working at 2.048 MHz and 8.192 MHz for E1lines are available. T1 is not supported. For each of these modes a submode exists, providing global or port specific synchronization. If global synchronization of all transmit and receive channels is desired, bit "symn" in "opmo" has to be deasserted. In this case FRMFB[0] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of all ports. Port specific frame and multiframe synchronization of transmit and receive channels is enabled if bit "symn" in "opmo" is set. In this case frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of each port is based on the corresponding FRMFB. After reset all outputs and input/output ports of the framer interface are in tristate mode. They will be enabled by setting bit "p_tx_act" of the corresponding "Port Configuration Register" ("pcfN", see Chapter 7.1). 5.1.3.1 Synchronous Mode at 2.048 MHz (SYM2) In SYM2 mode the framer interface is clocked with a 2.048 MHz clock connected to RFCLK. The mode is enabled by setting bit om = 11B in "opmo", see Chapter 7.24 All transmit and receive timeslots will be aligned to each other. FRCLK[7:0] Framer Receive Clock Unused FRDAT[7:0] Framer Receive Data depending on bit "frri" in "opmo" FRMFB[7:0] 0= FRDAT is sampled with the falling edge of RFCLK 1= FRDAT is sampled with the rising edge of RFCLK Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits p_ces in pcfN: 0= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe 1= Unstructured CES: Unused, no constant level allowed depending on bit "rfpp" in "opmo": Data Sheet 100 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 0= FRMFB is active low 1= FRMFB is active high depending on bit "symn" in "opmo": 0= FRMFB[0] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of all ports. FRMFB[1:7] are unused 1= FRMFB[N] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of corresponding ports FRMFB is always sampled with the opposite clock-edge of FRDAT. FRFRS[7:0] Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused FRLOS[7:0] Framer Receive Loss of Signalling FTCKO[7:0] Framer Transmit Clock Unused FTDAT[7:0] Framer Transmit Data depending on bit "frri" in "opmo": 0= FTDAT is clocked with the rising edge of RFCLK 1= FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of RFCLK FTMFS[7:0] Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Unused FTFRS[7:0] Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused RFCLK Reference Clock Central framer interface clock with 2.048 MHz RFCLK FRDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FRMFB FTDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 timeslot 31 4 5 timeslot 0 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 timeslot 1 FRDATn sampled with rising edge of RFCLK Fisym2e1 Figure 26 Framer Interface in SYM2 E1 Data Sheet 101 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.1.3.2 Synchronous Mode at 8.192 MHz (SYM8) In SYM8 mode the framer interface is clocked with an 8.192 MHz clock connected to RFCLK. The mode is enabled by setting bit om = 10B in "opmo", see Chapter 7.24 All timeslots (transmit and receive) will be aligned to each other. FRCLK[7:0] Framer Receive Clock Unused FRDAT[7:0] Framer Receive Data FRDAT is sampled in the middle of the bit period on the falling edge of RFCLK FRMFB[7:0] Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits p_ces in pcfN: 0= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe 1= Unstructured CES: Unused depending on bit "rfpp" in "opmo": 0= FRMFB is active low 1= FRMFB is active high depending on bit "symn" in "opmo": 0= FRMFB[0] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of all ports. FRMFB[1:7] are unused 1= FRMFB[N] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of corresponding ports FRMFB is always sampled with the opposite clock-edge of FRDAT. FRFRS[7:0] Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused FRLOS[7:0] Framer Receive Loss of Signalling FTCKO[7:0] Framer Transmit Clock Unused FTDAT[7:0] Framer Transmit Data FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of RFCLK: FTMFS[7:0] Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Unused Data Sheet 102 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description FTFRS[7:0] Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused RFCLK Reference Clock Central framer interface clock with 8.192 MHz RFCLK FRDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FRMFB FTDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 timeslot 31 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 timeslot 0 12 13 14 15 16 timeslot 1 Fisym8e1 Figure 27 5.1.4 Framer Interface in SYM8 E1 Echo Canceller Mode (EC) In this mode (pin EC = 0) transmit and receive channels are synchronized. The framer interface is clocked with an 8.192 MHz clock connected to RFCLK. All receive channels and the channels transmitted on even ports (near-end signal with echo) are synchronized by means of the FTFRS[0] pin. Shift exists between odd and even FTDAT ports FRCLK[7:0] Framer Receive Clock Unused FRDAT[7:0] Framer Receive Data FRDAT is sampled in the middle of the bit period on the falling edge of RFCLK FRMFB[7:0] Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Unused FRFRS[7:0] Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused FRLOS[7:0] Framer Receive Loss of Signalling FTCKO[7:0] Framer Transmit Clock Unused FTDAT[7:0] Framer Transmit Data FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of RFCLK: Data Sheet 103 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description FTMFS[7:0] Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Unused FTFRS[7:0] Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse FTFRS[0] is asserted synchronously to the transmission of the first bit of the first timeslot of each frame. FTFRS[1:7] are unused RFCLK Reference Clock Central framer interface clock with 8.192 MHz RFCLK FRDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FTFRS0 FTDATn even ports B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 timeslot 31 FTDATn odd ports 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 timeslot 0 13 14 15 16 timeslot 1 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 251 252 253 254 timeslot 31 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 timeslot 0 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 249 250 timeslot 1 FiECe1 Figure 28 Framer Interface in EC Mode Data Sheet 104 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.2 UTOPIA Interface IWE8 Figure 29 RXADR[0-4] RXDAT[0-7] RXPTY RXSOC RXCLAV RXENB RXCLK UTOPIA Receive Interface (Level 2) TXADR[0-4] TXDAT[0-7] TXPTY TXSOC TXCLAV TXENB TXCLK UTOPIA Transmit Interface (Level 2) Urati UTOPIA Receive and Transmit Interfaces in Slave Mode The UTOPIA receive and transmit interfaces are implemented according to the ATM forum UTOPIA Level 2 Specification [6] and to the UTOPIA Level 1 Specification [5]. For UTOPIA level 2 compliant mode, the device is compatible to a PHY layer with 8 data lines and 5 address lines. In UTOPIA level 1 compliant mode the interface can be configured to ATM and PHY layer with 8 data lines. In this case the address lines should be left unconnected. According to the UTOPIA standard the ATM-Layer polls the PHY-Ports via the UTOPIA address lines. If the address matches the programmed address range, the PHY controls the flow of data via the TXCLAV or RXCLAV signal. In transmit direction the PHY indicates via assertion of TXCLAV whether the corresponding port is capable of accepting data. In case data can not be transferred to the addressed port due to overrun of the programmed threshold of the port-specific cell buffer, the TXCLAV won't be activated. In receive direction, RXCLAV is activated, if data is available at the addressed port. Depending on the value of the "utmaster" bit in the "UTOPIA Configuration Register" ("utconf", see Chapter 7.34) the IWE8 will either act as an ATM -Layer (master mode) or PHY-Layer (slave mode). As an ATM-Layer, the IWE8 can only work in UTOPIA level 1 compliant mode. As PHY Layer, IWE8 supports both, single PHY in UTOPIA level 1 compliant mode and single/multi PHY in UTOPIA level 2 compliant mode. The selection between UTOPIA level 1 and level 2 can be done via the "utlevel" bit in "utconf". 5.2.1 Port Addresses The device can implement up to 8 PHY-Ports (= framer ports). Data Sheet 105 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description In case it is configured for UTOPIA level 2 MPHY mode, the amount of implemented PHY ports can be selected via the associated address range ("utconf[utrange]" with utconf[mapping_mode] = 0). In addition, the transmission of the UTOPIA port number via a user-defined field in the ATM header enables multi PHY operation even in UTOPIA level 1 mode and UTOPIA level 2 single PHY mode as described in Chapter 5.2.3. In UTOPIA level 2 MPHY mode no port number mapping into the ATM header is done. However, using this feature in UTOPIA level 2 mode, will give access to all PHY ports while the UTOPIA interface block is running in single PHY mode. For UTOPIA level 2 compliant multi PHY operation, "mapping_mode" should be reset. In this case the UDF field is set to all zero. In UTOPIA level 2 MPHY mode the port number is transported via the address pins. "utbaseadr" in "utconf" defines the base address under which the ports will be accessible. In UTOPIA level 1 mode, "utbaseadr" has to be set to "0" otherwise cells are discarded. If the device is in single PHY mode, it will react on the address, written into "utbaseadr". In multi PHY mode, the device will be accessible inside a window from "utbaseadr" to "utbaseadr" + "utrange". Where the nth port can be accessed at "utbaseadr" + n. 5.2.2 Back Pressure/ATM Cell Discarding Backpressure describes the mechanism that controls the TXCLAV signal in UTOPIA PHY mode. IWE8 supports two kinds of backpressure mechanisms, a general and a port specific one. Cells that are destined to inactive ports or channels are generally discarded. 5.2.2.1 General Backpressure Mechanism The general backpressure mechanism depends only on the filling level of the 4 cell UTOPIA input buffer. General backpressure is active in all UTOPIA configurations: * UTOPIA level 1compliant mode (utlevel=1) * UTOPIA level 2 PHY mode, where the selection between ports is done by ATM header fields (mapping_mode!=0) * UTOPIA level 2 PHY mode, with port selection by ATM header fields disabled (mapping_mode=0) and the port threshold mode ("p_thr_m" bits in "pcfN") disabled. The general threshold is defined in the "Threshold Register" ("thrshld", see Chapter 7.33). Data Sheet 106 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.2.2.2 Port Specific Backpressure Mechanism In addition to the general backpressure mechanism, port specific backpressure is available for ATM ports, when using the IWE8 as a UTOPIA level 2 PHY device ("utconf[utlevel]" =0, "utmaster" = 0, "mapping_mode" =0 and "pcfN[p_atm]" =1). It needs to be explicitly enabled with the "p_thr_m" bits in the "Port Configuration Registers" ("pcfN", see Chapter 7.1). Whenever the port transmit buffer filling level falls below the programmed value and the port is selected via the UTOPIA PHY address, the TXCLAV signal is activated, allowing another data transfer for that port. If this transfer exceeds the predefined buffer filling level, the UTOPIA interface immediately enters backpressure state for this port. When using the port specific backpressure mechanism ("p_thr_m" = 01B or 10B) the general threshold defined in the "Threshold Register" ("thrshld", see Chapter 7.33) should be higher than the port specific threshold defined in the "Threshold Port Register" ("thrspN", see Chapter 7.38 to Chapter 7.41). 5.2.3 Sideband Signals of the UTOPIA Interface In UTOPIA level 1 mode or UTOPIA level 2 single PHY mode, the framer port number ("port_nr[2:0]") can be transmitted via the UTOPIA interface. The field contains the number of the physical (framer) port associated with that ATM cell. Its location inside the ATM header is configurable via the "mapping_mode" bits in "utconf" (Chapter 7.34). Possible locations are: GFC[3:1], VPI[7:5], VCI[15:13], VCI[7:5] or UDF[2:0]. In AAL mode, the channel number ("channel_nr", first timeslot number of a channel, reference timeslot) has to be transmitted on the UTOPIA transmit interface via VCI[4:0]. If no discarding of cells with uncorrectable HEC error is selected on a specific port via bits "a_hec_mode" in the register "acfg" (Chapter 7.2) and "p_cell_disc" in the register "pcfN" (Chapter 7.1) an HEC error flag (HEF) indicates corrupted HEC by setting the most significant bit in the user defined octet at the UTOPIA interface. For correct operation bit "p_cell_disc" must be cleared. The bit ENB, bit 5 of the user defined octet, is responsible for the decision if cell discarding shall base on CLP or CLPI. Data Sheet 107 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description MSB LSB port_nr[2:0] GFC[3:1] / VPI[11:9] port_nr[2:0] VPI[7:5] VPI[4] VPI[3:0] port_nr[2:0] VCI 15..13 VCI[12] VCI[11:8] port_nr[2:0] VCI[7:5] channel_nr[3:0] VCI[3:0] PTI HEF CLPI ENB UDF[7] UDF[6] UDF[5] GFC[0] / VPI[8] channel_ nr[4] Header octet 2 Header octet 3 VCI[4] CLP port_nr[2:0] UDF[2:0] UDF[4:3] Header octet 1 Header octet 4 User Defined Field UTOPIA sideband Figure 30 Data Sheet Utopia Sideband Signals 108 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.3 IMA Interface The IWE8 has provisions to support the Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) protocol implemented in an external component. These are: * An IMA interface * A programmable threshold between read and write pointer of the mapping buffer. If an Uncorrectable HEC Error (UNCHEC) is detected, the cell is discarded and the UNCHEC signal will be asserted. At the same time the port number, where the cell came from, will be available at pins PN[2:0]. The ATM Transmit Buffer Threshold Crossing (ATBTC) signal becomes active when the difference between write and read pointer of the ATM Transmit Buffer becomes smaller than the threshold selected with bits "bufthr" in the "Operation Mode Register" ("opmo", see Chapter 7.24). At the same time the Port Number, where the cell came from, will be available at pins PN[2:0]. At the IMA interface the IWE8 operates in cycles of 12 system clocks. ATBTC can become active during cycle #3, the UNCHEC can become active during cycle #9. The Port number is always active for 6 cycles. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CLOCK ATBTC UNCHEC PN0..2 Imai Figure 31 IMA Interface Protocol For more detailed information on the IMA interface refer to the Application Hint "Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) with the Interworking Element IWE8". Data Sheet 109 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.4 Clock Recovery Interface It is possible to use an external device for clock recovery instead of the ICRC. Therefore an external clock recovery interface is provided. It allows the transmission and reception of serial communication frames containing SRTS values or ACM buffer filling levels to and from an external clock recovery circuit. The usage is controlled by the bits "rtsgen" and "rts_eval" in the Operation Mode Register ("opmo", see Chapter 7.24). The Clock Recovery Interface is a 5 line serial interface: 1 data input SDI, 2 data outputs SDOD and SDOR and 1 synchronization output SSP. The interface allows connection to external clock recovery circuits. Two methods for clock recovery are supported: Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS) and Adaptive Clock Method (ACM). The IWE8 also allows a combination of SRTS and ACM. The data sent over the serial lines is always formatted in frames of 32 bits. The SSP pulse indicates the frame start for both directions. The inter-frame delay should be equivalent to the payload of 8 ATM cells (e.g. for completely filled cells without SDT every 3008 clock periods). Each valid frame is supposed to contain a valid RTS value Table 27 shows the interface frame format. Bit [31] is sent first. When no data is to be sent, idle frames are transmitted consisting of bits [31:1] all 1 and parity bit[ 0] = 0. Table 27 also indicates which data fields are used on the different interface signals. Table 27 Clock Recovery Interface frame format Bits Data field SDI SDOD SDOR 31- 29 111 Yes Yes Yes 28 - 25 RTS[3:0] Yes Yes No 24 - 11 buffer_fill[13:0] No Yes No 10 RTS_valid No Yes No 9-8 00 Yes Yes Yes 7-5 port_nr[2:0] Yes Yes Yes 4-2 type[2:0] 001: RTS only 010: "buffer_fill" only 011: RTS + "buffer_fill" 111: reset RTS logic others: not used No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes 1 frame_invalid Yes Yes Yes 0 odd_parity Yes Yes Yes Data Sheet 110 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description To allow the external SRTS generation logic to synchronize with the cell segmentation process, the IWE8 will output a frame with type = 111 on the SDOR signal when the segmentation of the first ATM cell for a selected channel starts. The first two sequences of 8 ATM cells will contain a dummy RTS value which is programmable in the "ASIC Configuration Register" ("acfg", see Chapter 7.2). From the third sequence on the values received on the SDI input will be used. The IWE8 has internal `RTS Buffers' for 2 RTS values per port. When one of the `RTS Buffers' overflows, the value in excess will be omitted and a bit in the Extended Interrupt Status Register 2 (eis2, see Chapter 7.20) will be set. When `RTS Buffer' underflow occurs, the last received RTS value will be repeated in the next sequence of 8 ATM cells. The RTS value extracted from a cycle of 8 ATM cells with sequence count 0 to 7, is transmitted on SDOD when the cell with sequence count 1 from the next cycle is received. The `RTS_valid' field is used to indicate whether the extracted RTS value is correct or not. An extracted RTS is accepted as valid if in the previous cycle of 8 cells the cells with SN = 1, 3, 5 and 7 were present and were accepted as valid cells. The buffer filling level is transmitted for use with the Adaptive Clock Method (ACM) and is expressed as a number of octets contained in the `Reassembly Buffer'. The buffer filling level is transmitted every time when a new ATM cell for the selected channel is received. Data Sheet 111 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.5 Microprocessor Interface IWE8 contains internal registers, 4 internal RAMs and an external RAM that can be read and written via the Microprocessor Interface. As access to the internal registers is 16-bit oriented, the Microprocessor Address Bus (MPADR) is designed for 16-bit boundaries. Access to the 32-bit-wide internal or external RAM has to be executed in two consecutive 16 bit cycles. The Microprocessor data bus (MPDAT) has "little endian" word order. Little to big endian conversion may be implemented either by initialization of the microcontroller or by hardwiring MPDAT[7:0] to DATA[15:8] and MPDAT[15:8] to DATA[7:0] respectively, The 32 bit oriented accesses have to be done by two consecutive 16 bit accesses, the first with MPADR[0] = 0 and the second with MPADR[0] = 1. The IWE8 will not verify whether the address bits MPADR[17:1] during the second access are the same as during the first access. The data of the first of two consecutive write cycles (MPADR[0] = 0) is written temporarily into an internal write-cache register. The second write cycle (MPADR[0] = 1) causes the data to be written into internal or external RAM. Bits [15:0] are written from the internal write-cache register and bits [31:16] are transferred from MPDAT During the first of two consecutive read cycles (MPADR[0] = 0), the 32 bit data are actually read from internal or external RAM. Bits [15:0] are transferred to the databus MPDAT. Bits [31:16] are written into an internal read-cache register. During the second read (MPADR[0] = 1) the read-cache register is transferred to the databus. When only bits [15:0] are needed, the second read cycle can be omitted. For proper operation without acknowledge handshake via MPRDY 23 waitstates can be used. 5.5.1 Interrupt Handling The IWE8 provides two independent interrupt pins MPIR1 and MPIR2. The interrupt handling software should read the interrupt status registers to identify the causes of the interrupt. MPIR1 is the main interrupt pin indicating a special event in the IWE8. The interrupt cause can be determined by reading Interrupt Status Register 1 ("isr1", see Chapter 7.18). Each of the interrupt sources can be individually masked in the corresponding interrupt mask register. If the interrupt source is masked, the interrupt pin MPIR1 will not be asserted when the corresponding event occurs. MPIR2 is an auxiliary interrupt pin. The IWE8 provides two sets of 8 independent timers in external RAM (timer set 1 and 2). Timer set 2 can be used independently from the rest of the IWE8 driver software. When one of the timers of timer set 2 expires, a bit will be set in the Interrupt Status Register 2 ("isr2", see Chapter 7.23) and MPIR2 will be asserted. Data Sheet 112 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.5.2 Microprocessor Interface Mode The IWE8 microprocessor interface allows connection of Intel type microprocessors as well as Motorola type microprocessors (e.g. the PowerPC). The Microprocessor Interface Mode is determined via the status of the pins PMT and TBUS at the positive edge of the internal reset. Therefore, PMT and TBUS levels have to be kept at least 3 clock cycles after deassertion of RESET. Table 28 Configuration of the Microprocessor Interface Mode PMT TBUS Mode 0 0 Intel Mode 1 1 Motorola Mode The mode currently assigned to the microprocessor interface is visible via "mtypsel" in the "Version Register" ("vers", see Chapter 7.16). Intel Mode The connection of the 16 bit Intel compatible asynchronous microprocessor interface to an Intel 386EX processor is shown in Figure 32. If the ready signal at pin MPRDY shall be used, a glue logic between MPRDY of the IWE8 and RDY of the 386EX is required, which generates an active low signal with 1 microprocessor cycle length after a rising edge detection of the MPRDY signal. Intel i386 EX IWE8 MPIR2 MPIR1 INTi INTj CSn RD WR DATA[0-15] ADR[1-18] MPCS MPRD MPWR MPDAT[0-15] MPADR[0-17] Coitm Figure 32 Connection of IWE8 to an Intel Type Microprocessor Motorola Mode Figure 33 shows the connection of the 16 bit Motorola compatible asynchronous interface to the MC68xxx. Data Sheet 113 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description MC 68xxx IWE8 INTi INTj DSACK1 MPIR2 MPIR1 MPTA CSn DS R/W DATA[0-15] A[1-18] MPCS MPTS MPRW MPDAT[0-15] MPADR[0-17] comom Figure 33 Data Sheet Connection of IWE8 to an Motorola Type Microprocessor 114 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.6 External RAM Interface The IWE8 needs to be connected to an external synchronous SRAM of 64k x 33 bits with parity protection or 64k x 32 bits without parity protection. For proper operation FT (Flow Through) SSRAM is needed. Pipelined SSRAM can not be used, as this type has additional registered outputs. A possible connection with 1 SRAM 64k x 36 component is shown in Figure 34. . SRAM 64K x 36 IWE8 CLK A[0-15] CS WR OE ADSC D[0-35] RMCLK RMADR[0-15] RMCS RMWR RMOE RMADC RMDAT[0-32] erc Figure 34 External RAM Connection The IWE8 has a fixed RAM interface cycle of 12 clock periods. A sequence of 6 consecutive read cycles (addresses AR1 to AR6), a dummy address cycle and 5 consecutive write cycles (addresses AW1 to AW5) is continuously repeated. The timing of RMADC and RMOE is always fixed as shown in Figure 35. Whether the IWE8 reads data from the external RAM or writes data into the external RAM is controlled by the RMCS and RMWR signals. In Figure 35, data R1 and R3 are actually read by the IWE8, and data W1 and W3 are actually written into the external RAM. Data Sheet 115 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description RMCLK RMADR W5 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 R1 RMADC RMOE RMDAT W5 R6 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 RMWR RMCS RAM cycle Ram Interface Protoco Figure 35 Data Sheet RAM Interface Protocol 116 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.7 Boundary Scan Interface The boundary scan interface implements the Test Access Port (TAP) as defined in IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 [19] including the optional TRST reset signal. The device identification register, the instruction register and boundary-scan register are described in the electrical characteristics. Data Sheet 117 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Interface Description 5.8 Master Clock The basic processing time of an octet in the IWE8 is 12 clock cycles. As the time needed to process one octet for each of the 8 ports must be less than the time required to transfer one octet over a framer interface, this leads to the condition: m x o x T CLOCK < f x b x T FramerClk [15] with: m = 12 master-clock cycles needed for one octet per port o = 8 ports f = Framer-clock cycles per bit b = 8 bits per octet T Clock f > ------ x T FramerClk 12 Table 29 [16] Master Clock Frequency Depending on Mode Mode TCLOCK FCLOCK FAM, SYM8 and EC < 1/3 x TFramerCLK > 3 x FFramerCLK = 3 x 8.192 MHz GIM E1 and SYM2 < 1/12 x TFramerCLK > 12 x FFramerCLK = 12 x 2.048 MHz GIM T1 < 1/12 x TFramerCLK > 12 x FFramerCLK = 12 x 1.544 MHz Data Sheet 118 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 6 Memory Structure The IWE8 occupies an address space of 256k x 16 bits. The lower 128k x 16 bits are used for internal registers and internal configuration RAM's. The upper 128k x 16 bits are used to address external RAM. MPADR[17:0] 3FFFFH RMADR[15:0] 128k x 16 64k x 32 FFFFH External RAM 0000H 20000H 1FFFFH Not used 00A00H 009FFH 512 x 16 256 x 32 Internal RAM4 00800H 007FFH 512 x 16 256 x 32 Internal RAM3 00600H 005FFH 512 x 16 256 x 32 Internal RAM2 00400H 003FFH 512 x 16 256 x 32 Internal RAM1 00200H 001FFH 512 x 16 Internal Registers 00000H Figure 36 Memory Model The 4 internal configuration RAMs are organized as 256 x 32 bit memories, but RAM4 has only 16 bits implemented (bit positions 16 to 31 are always read as "0"). Data Sheet 119 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure The external RAM is organized as a 64k x 32 bit parity protected memory. Accesses to internal configuration RAM's or external RAM are always 32 bit oriented. 6.1 Internal Configuration RAM's The 4 internal 256 x 32 bit configuration RAM's (RAM1, RAM2, RAM3 and RAM4) are used to assign the timeslots of the Framer Receive and Framer Transmit interfaces to ATM channels. For each port there are 32 entries. RAM1 is used to define the timeslots of the Framer Receive ports, and RAM2 and RAM3 are used to define the Framer Transmit ports. RAM4 is responsible for CAS conditioning and freezing in transmit direction When the contents of the internal RAMs have been altered by the software, the internal state machines will load the new values within the next 1.5 frame cycles (187.5 s). Up to that point of time the previous values are used. Data Sheet 120 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 6.1.1 RAM1: Receive Port Configuration Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 256K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 slots x 1 doubleword MPADR 6.1.1.1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 7 6 port_nr [2:0] 5 4 3 2 1 0 slot[4:0] RAM1: ATM Receive Reference Slot Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 24 Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 Not used 7 0 ocd_start ocd_end _intrpt _intrpt ocd_start_ intrpt ocd_end_ intrpt go_hunt Data Sheet go_hunt delete_ x43_ idle_cells descram bling channel_mode[1:0] ref_slot =1 Generate interrupt when OCD state starts 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Generate interrupt when OCD state ends 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Go to hunt state 121 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 0= Cell delineation finite state machine normal operation 1= Cell delineation finite state machine forced in hunt state Only the transition 0 1 forces the hunt state. Counter (number of times SYNC state is left) is not incremented. Ocd_start interrupt is not generated. delete_idle_ Delete idle/unassigned cells enable cells x43_de scrambling channel_ mode ref_slot 0= Disabled 1= Enabled ATM cell payload descrambling enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Channel mode 00 = Inactive mode 01 = Active mode (normal mode) 10 = Standby mode 11 = Active mode (normal mode) Reference slot indicator 1= This slot is a reference slot Note: To allow IWE8 internal initialization, all channels must remain in inactive mode for at least 250 s after activation of the port (i.e. setting pcfN[p_rx_act] = 1). During this time the device connected to the Framer Receive Interface has to be in normal operation. 6.1.1.2 RAM1: ATM Receive Continuation Slot Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. Data Sheet 122 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 31 24 Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used ref_slot_nr[4:0] cont_slot =1 ref_slot_nr Reference slot number Number of the reference slot of this channel cont_slot Continuation slot indicator 1= ref_slot This slot is a continuation slot Reference slot indicator 0= 6.1.1.3 ref_slot =0 This slot is not a reference slot RAM1: AAL Receive Reference Slot Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW . 31 24 next_slot_nr[4:0] sdt_mfs sig_cond 23 16 subst_bpslct[1:0] dcor dcor_random_nr[4:0] 15 8 aal0 part_fill[5:0] band_ width[4] 7 0 band_width[3:0] Data Sheet srts sdt 123 channel_mode[1:0] ref_slot =1 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure next_slot_nr Next slot number If band_width > 0 next_slot_nr points to the next slot of this channel. If band_width = 0 and CAS is activated next_slot_nr[3:0] will be used as signalling conditioning nibbles. If band_width = 0 and CAS is not activated next_slot_nr is don't care. sdt_mfs sig_cond srts subst_ bpslct dcor dcor_ random_nr SDT multiframe pulse select X= If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 or pcfN[p_ces] = 1 0= Start of structure is frame pulse 1= Start of structure is multiframe pulse as defined by pcfN[p_tx_mfs] Signalling conditioning upstream 0= CAS freezing upstream enabled in "loss of signal" condition 1= CAS conditioning upstream enabled in "loss of signal" condition SRTS enable Enables RTS value insertion into AAL1 SAR-PDUs X= If pcfN[p_srts] = 0 or [aal0] = 1 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Substitute byte-pattern select 00 = Select byte-pattern 0, defined in bp10[bp0] 01 = Select byte-pattern 1, defined in bp10[bp1] 10 = Select byte-pattern 2, defined in bp32[bp2] 11 = Select byte-pattern 3, defined in bp32[bp3] Decorrelation circuit enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Decorrelation random Number X= aal0 part_fill Data Sheet if [dcor] = 0 AAL0 enable 0= Disabled (AAL1 is used) 1= Enabled (instead of AAL1) Partially filled cell filling level 124 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 4 to 48 AAL0: [aal0] = 1 4 to 47 AAL1 unstructured CES: [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 1 4 to 47 AAL1 structured CES without CAS1): [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 0, pcfN[p_cas] = 0 4+Cb AAL1 structured CES with CAS2): to 46 [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 0, pcfN[p_cas] = 1 band_width sdt channel_ mode ref_slot band_width N-1 Structured CES (with N = number of timeslots of the channel) 1FH Unstructured CES (pcfN[p_ces] = 1) SDT enable X= If pcfN[p_ces] = 1 or [aal0] = 1 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Channel mode 00 = Inactive mode 01 = Active mode (normal mode) 10 = Standby mode 11 = Substitute mode Reference slot indicator 1= This slot is a reference slot 1) non-P format, cell may have only 46 user data octets in P format 2) Cb: Required bytes for the CAS sub-block in an ATM cell Note: To allow IWE8 internal initialization, all channels must remain in inactive mode for at least 250 s after activation of the port (i.e. setting pcfN[p_rx_act] = 1). During this time the device connected to the Framer Receive Interface has to be in normal operation. Note: If frame based SDT without CAS is used and filling level 45, the condition band_width part_fill has to be fulfilled for correct operation. Multiframe based SDT without CAS should not be used. Data Sheet 125 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 6.1.1.4 RAM1: AAL Receive Continuation Slot Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 24 next_slot_nr[4:0] Not used 23 16 Not used sig_cond_nibble[3:0] fourth_ slot_nr[4] 15 8 fourth_slot_nr[3:0] third_slot_nr[4:1] 7 0 third_slot _nr[0] ref_slot_nr[4:0] cont_slot =1 ref_slot =0 next_slot_nr Next slot number Number of the next slot of this channel. When no continuation slots exist, the entry "next_slot_nr" should refer to the reference slot. sig_cond_ nibble 4 bits for signalling conditioning It is possible to have different signalling conditioning nibbles for all slots of a channel except for the first two slots of a channel. The first slot in a channel will always use the same nibbles as the first continuation slot. fourth_slot_ Fourth slot number nr Number of the fourth slot of this channel X= third_slot_ nr If [band_width] < 3 Third slot number Number of the third slot of this channel X= If [band_width] < 2 ref_slot_nr Reference slot number Number of the reference slot of this channel cont_slot Continuation slot indicator 1= ref_slot Reference slot indicator 0= Data Sheet This slot is a continuation slot This slot is not a reference slot 126 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 6.1.1.5 RAM1: ATM or AAL Receive Idle Slot Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 24 Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used cont_slot ref_slot =0 Continuation slot indicator 0= ref_slot This slot is not a continuation slot Reference slot indicator 0= 6.1.2 cont_slot =0 This slot is not a reference slot RAM2: Transmit Port Configuration Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 256K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 slots x 1 doubleword MPADR 6.1.2.1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 8 7 port_nr [2:0] 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 slot[4:0] RAM2: ATM Transmit Reference Slot Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. Data Sheet 127 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 31 24 Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used x43_scram bling channel_ mode ref_slot x43_ channel_mode[1:0] scram-bli ng ref_slot =1 ATM cell payload scrambling enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Channel mode 00 = Inactive mode 01 = Active mode (normal mode) 10 = Standby mode 11 = Active mode (normal mode) Reference slot indicator 1= This slot is a reference slot Note: RAM slot 1 has always to be configured always as reference slot. Note: To allow IWE8 internal initialization, all channels must remain in inactive mode for at least 250 s after activation of the port (i.e. setting pcfN[p_tx_act] = 1). During this time the device connected to the Framer Transmit Interface has to be in normal operation. 6.1.2.2 RAM2: ATM Transmit Continuation Slot Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. Data Sheet 128 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 31 24 next_slot_nr[4:0] = 00000 Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used ref_slot_nr[4:0] cont_slot =1 ref_slot =0 next_slot_nr Next slot number 0= This field must be all 0 for ATM continuation slots ref_slot_nr Reference slot number Number of the reference slot of this channel cont_slot Continuation slot indicator 1= ref_slot This slot is a continuation slot Reference slot indicator 0= 6.1.2.3 This slot is not a reference slot RAM2: AAL Transmit Reference Slot Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 24 next_slot_nr[4:0] Not used snp_ check 23 sc_fast 16 sdt_mfs sdt_oos_nr[1:0] sdt_par 15 aal0 sdt_once crv_en mcp_ reinit 8 part_fill[5:0] 7 Data Sheet sn_ check band_ width[4] 0 129 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure band_width[3:0] sdt channel_mode[1:0] ref_slot =1 next_slot_nr Next slot number Number of the second slot of this channel. When no continuation slots exist, the entry "next_slot_nr" should refer to the reference slot. X= snp_check sn_check sc_fast sdt_mfs sdt_oos_nr sdt_par Data Sheet If pcfN[p_ces] = 1 SNP field check enable X= If [aal0] = 1 or [sn_check] = 0 0= Disabled 1= Enabled SN field check enable X= If [aal0] = 1 0= Disabled 1= Enabled SC algorithm select X= If [aal0] = 1 or [sn_check] = 0 0= Standard SC algorithm 1= Fast SC algorithm SDT multiframe pulse select X= If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 or pcfN[p_ces] = 1 0= Start of structure is frame pulse 1= Start of structure is multiframe pulse Number of SDT out of sync errors before re-initialization buffer X= If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 00 = Re-initialize after 1 out of sync error (recommended) 01 = Re-initialize after 2 out of sync error 10 = Re-initialize after 3 out of sync error 11 = Not allowed, IWE8 will not be able to re-initialize SDT pointer parity check enable X= If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 0= Disabled 130 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 1= sdt_once crv_en Enabled SDT pointer appears once in 8 cell cycle X= If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 0= All cells with CSI bit = 1 and even SN are supposed to contain a P format SAR-SDU. 1= Only the first cell with CSI bit = 1 and even SN in a cycle of 8 cells is supposed to contain a P format SAR-SDU. (recommended for SDT) Data to Clock Recovery interface enable (RTS values and/or ACM buffer filling levels) This bit may only be set for one channel per port. X= if (pcfN[p_srts] = 0 and pcfN[p_acm] = 0) or acfg[a_crv_en] = 0 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Only one channel per port may have crv_en set to 1. mcp_reinit aal0 part_fill Microprocessor forced reassembly buffer reinitialization The SW should set and reset this bit to continue proper operation. 0= Disabled 1= Enabled AAL0 enable 0= Disabled (AAL1 is used) 1= Enabled (instead of AAL1) Partially filled cell filling level 4 to 48 AAL0: [aal0] = 1 4 to 47 AAL1 unstructured CES: [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 1 4 to 47 AAL1 structured CES without CAS1): [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 0, pcfN[p_cas] = 0 4+Cb AAL1 structured CES with CAS2): to 47 [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 0, pcfN[p_cas] = 1 band_width sdt Data Sheet band_width N (with N = number of timeslots for this channel) X= if pcfN[p_ces] = 1 Structured Data Transfer enable 131 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure channel_ mode ref_slot X= If pcfN[p_ces] = 1 or [aal0] = 1 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Channel mode 00 = Inactive mode 01 = Active mode (normal mode) 10 = Standby mode 11 = Active mode (normal mode) Reference slot indicator 1= This slot is a reference slot 1) non-P format, cell may have only 46 user data octets in P format 2) Cb: Required bytes for the CAS sub-block in an ATM cell Note: To allow IWE8 internal initialization, all channels must remain in inactive mode for at least 250 s after activation of the port (i.e. setting pcfN[p_rx_act] = 1). During this time the device connected to the Framer Transmit Interface has to be in normal operation. Note: If frame based SDT without CAS is used and filling level 45, the condition band_width part_fill has to be fulfilled for correct operation. Multiframe based SDT without CAS should not be used. 6.1.2.4 RAM2: AAL Transmit Continuation Slot Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 24 next_slot_nr[4:0] Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 Not used slot_index[4:0] 7 0 Not used ref_slot_nr[4:0] Data Sheet 132 cont_slot =1 ref_slot =0 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure next_slot_nr Next slot number Number of the next slot of this channel. When no continuation slots exist, the entry "next_slot_nr" should refer to the reference slot. slot_index Index number of the current slot X= if pcfN[p_cas] = 0 2= 3= ... 30 = 1st continuation slot 2nd continuation slot ... 29th continuation slot ref_slot_nr Reference slot number Number of the reference slot of this channel cont_slot Continuation slot indicator 1= ref_slot Reference slot indicator 0= 6.1.2.5 This is a continuation slot This slot is not a reference slot RAM2: ATM or AAL Transmit Idle Slot Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 24 Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 Not used idle_ bpslct[1] 7 0 idle_ bpslct[0] idle_bpslct Not used ref_slot =0 Idle slot byte-pattern select 00 = Data Sheet cont_slot =0 Select byte-pattern 0, defined in bp10[bp0] 133 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure cont_slot 01 = Select byte-pattern 1, defined in bp10[bp1] 10 = Select byte-pattern 2, defined in bp32[bp2] 11 = Select byte-pattern 3, defined in bp32[bp3] Continuation slot indicator 0= ref_slot This is not a continuation slot Reference slot indicator 0= 6.1.3 This slot is not a reference slot RAM3: Transmit Port Configuration Extended Read/write Address 00600H to 007FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 256K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 slots x 1 doubleword MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 8 7 port_nr [2:0] 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 slot[4:0] RAM3 needs only to be programmed in the case of an "AAL Transmit Reference Slot'. In all other cases the RAM3 entry is don't care. 6.1.3.1 RAM3: AAL Transmit Reference Slot Read/write Address 00600H to 007FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 24 Not used starv_bpslct[1:0] starv_ini[10:8] 23 16 starv_ini[7:0] 15 8 buff_lsize[13:6] 7 0 buff_lsize[5:0] Data Sheet auto_ reinit_of 134 auto_ reinit_uf 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure starv_bpslct Starvation byte-pattern select starv_ini 00 = Select byte-pattern 0, defined in bp10[bp0] 01 = Select byte-pattern 1, defined in bp10[bp1] 10 = Select byte-pattern 2, defined in bp32[bp2] 11 = Select byte-pattern 3, defined in bp32[bp3] Number of starvation octets sent at reassembly buffer initialization. 0.. The actual number of starvation octets sent is starv_ini + 1 2046 2047 An unlimited number of starvation octets will be sent buff_lsize Logical size of reassembly buffer in octets auto_reinit_ Automatic reassembly buffer reinitialization at overflow of X= If [aal0] =1 0= P controlled reassembly buffer initialization 1= automatic reassembly buffer initialization auto_reinit_ Automatic reassembly buffer reinitialization at underflow uf 6.1.4 X= If [aal0] = 1 0= P controlled reassembly buffer initialization 1= automatic reassembly buffer initialization RAM4: Transmit Port Configuration Extended Read/write Address 00800H to 009FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 256K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 slots x 1 doubleword MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 8 7 port_nr [2:0] 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 slot[4:0] RAM4 needs only to be programmed in the case of an "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" and in case of CAS usage. In all other cases the RAM4 entry is don't care. Data Sheet 135 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 6.1.4.1 RAM4: AAL Transmit Conditioning Slot Read/write Address 00800H to 009FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 23 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used cond_en cond_down_nibble[3:0] cond_down _nibble CAS conditioning nibbles in downstream for the slot cond_en Conditioning enable 0= CAS downstream freezing enabled in underrun or pointer mismatch condition 1= CAS downstream conditioning enabled in underrun or pointer mismatch condition Note: Bit positions 16 to 31 are not implemented and always read as "0": Data Sheet 136 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 6.2 External RAM The IWE8 requires an external 64K x 32 bit RAM. A 33th bit is added for parity. MPADR[17:0] RMADR[15:0] 64k x 16 3FFFFH 30000H 32k x 32 Reassembly / ATM Transmit Buffers 32k x 16 2FFFFH 28000H 8000H 16k x 32 7FFFH Segmentation / ATM Receive Buffers 27FFFH 8128 x 16 26040H 4000H 4064 x 32 3FFFH Cell Extraction Buffer 3020H 32 x 16 2603FH 16 x 32 26020H 301FH Cell Insertion Buffer 32 x 16 2601FH 3010H 16 x 32 26000H 300FH Timers 8k x 16 25FFFH 24000H 22000H 3000H 4k x 32 2FFFH Interrupt queue 2000H 4k x 32 1FFFH 8k x 16 23FFFH Statistics Counter thresholds 8k x 16 21FFFH 1000H 4k x 32 20000H 0FFFH Statistics Counters Figure 37 6.2.1 FFFFH 0000H Structure of the IWE8 external RAM Statistics Counters Read/write Address 20000H to 21FFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 4K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 channels x 16 counters. The statistics counters are incremented when the "channel_mode" is active or standby, and when the corresponding enable bit in the "catm" or "caal" register is set. RMADR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 counter_nr[3:0] 0 1 Data Sheet 0 0 0 0 port_nr [2:0] channel_nr[4:0] 137 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure Table 30 Statistics Counters for ATM Ports 1) counter_nr Counter contents 0 2) Number of discarded cells due to output queue, ATM Receive Buffer overflow 1 Number of received cells with correctable HEC errors 2 Number of received cells with non-correctable HEC errors 3 Number of times cell delineation SYNC state is left, except when forced by the processor 4 Number of discarded cells due to ATM transmit buffer overflow 5 Number of cells which have been discarded because of CLP or CLPI 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 Not used 9 Not used 10 Not used 11 Not used 12 Not used 13 Not used 14 Not used 15 Not used 1) For ATM ports, the counters are located in channel_nr = 00000B 2) Counter_nr 0 is common to all ports and is located in port_nr = 111B channel_nr = 11111B Table 31 Statistics Counters for AAL Ports1) Counter_nr Counter contents 0 2) Number of discarded cells due to Output Queue or Segmentation Buffer overflow 1 Not used 2 Number of cells written to the Reassembly Buffer. It excludes cells that were discarded for any reason and cells that are inserted instead of lost cells (atmfReassembledCells) 3 Number of times incoming MFB pulse is not synchronous to SDT start of structure upstream (AAL1) Data Sheet 138 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure Table 31 Statistics Counters for AAL Ports1) (cont'd) 4 Number of cells causing a Reassembly Buffer overflow (AAL0 & AAL1). It includes accepted cells that are causing the filling level to exceed the predefined threshold and discarded cells due to the attempt of writing to the Reassembly Buffer when the threshold is already exceeded. 5 Number of end of Reassembly Buffer overflow (AAL0 & AAL1). The value is incremented upon acceptance of the next cell after Reassembly Buffer overflow. 6 The count of the number of AAL1 header errors detected including those corrected. Header errors include correctable and uncorrectable CRC, plus bad parity. (atmfCESHdrErrors) 7 Number of times that the sequence number of an incoming AAL1 SAR-PDU causes a transition of the SC algorithm from "sync" to "out of sequence" and from "invalid" to "out of sync" 8 Number of downstream "misinserted cells" detected by the AAL1 sequence count algorithm (atmfCESMisinsertedCells) 9 Number of downstream cells discarded by the AAL1 sequence count algorithm 10 Number of rejected AAL1 SDT pointers due to parity error or wrong pointer value (93 < pointer <127) 11 Number of SC cycles with more than one AAL1 SDT pointer field if only one pointer is expected (sdt_once = 1) 12 Number of start of reassembly buffer underflow (AAL0 & AAL1) (atmfCESBufUnderflow) 13 3) Number of inserted starvation cells (AAL0 & AAL1) due to reassembly buffer underflow 14 Number of times the Reassembly Buffer is re-initialized due to AAL1 start of structure is out of sync with port start of structure (see Chapter 4.4.1.11) This records the count of the number of events in which the AAL1 reassembler found that an SDT pointer is not where it is expected, and the pointer must be reacquired. This count is only meaningful for structured CES. (atmfCESPointerReframes) 15 Number of downstream "lost cells" detected by the AAL1 sequence count algorithm (atmfCESLostCells) 1) For AAL ports with unstructured CES, the counters are located in channel_nr = 00000B 2) Counter_nr 0 is common for all ports and is located in port_nr = 111B channel_nr = 11111B Data Sheet 139 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure 3) If the "auto-re-initialization on underflow" feature is enabled (RAM3.AAL Transmit Reference Slot.auto_reinit_uf = 1B), the re-initialization of the Reassembly Buffer will terminate an underflow status as soon as start of underflow is detected. Thus, the underflow status for the device is no longer valid although the underflow condition still exists. No starvation cells due to underflow will be inserted and counter 13 will not increment Therefore, it is recommended to disable "auto-re-initialization on underflow" (RAM3.AAL Transmit Reference Slot.auto_reinit_uf = 0B) and perform the re-initialization of the reassembly buffer by software. The format of the counter entries is as follows: 31 24 int_gen count_value[30:24] 23 16 count_value[23:16] 15 8 count_value[15:8] 7 0 count_value[7:0] int_gen interrupt queue entry generated Indicates if an interrupt queue entry was generated for this counter. Only one interrupt queue entry per counter can be generated. 0= False 1= True count_value counter value 4000_0000H indicates the maximum value. The counter will not increment beyond this value 6.2.2 Statistics Counter thresholds Read/write Address 22000H to 23FFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 4K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 channels x 16 counter thresholds Data Sheet 140 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure RMADR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 1 port_nr [2:0] channel_nr [4:0] counter_nr [3:0] 0 0 The format of the counter threshold entries is as follows: 31 24 thres_act thres_value[30:24] 23 16 thres_value[23:16] 15 8 thres_value[15:8] 7 0 thres_value[7:0] thres_act threshold active thres_value 6.2.3 0= Disabled 1= Enabled threshold value Thresholds beyond 4000 0000H will never create an interrupt queue entry as the counter stops at this value Interrupt Queue Read/write Address 24000H to 25FFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 4K x 32 bits RMADR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Data Sheet 0 0 1 0 interrupt_queue_addr[11:0] 141 0 0 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure For reading the Interrupt Queue refer to Chapter 4.6.3. Each interrupt queue entry identifies a particular statistics counter that has reached its threshold value. The format of the interrupt queue entries is as follows: 31 24 Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 iq_ne not used port_nr [2:0] channel_ nr[4] 7 0 channel_nr[3:0] iq_ne 6.2.4 counter_nr[3:0] interrupt queue not empty 0= interrupt queue is empty, no further entries 1= interrupt queue is not empty, further entries can be read Timers Read/write Address 26000H to 2601FH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 16 x 32 bits: 2 timer sets x 8 timers RMADR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 timer_nr[3:0] 0 timer_nr[3] timer_nr [2:0] Data Sheet 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Timer number Selects the timer set 0= Timer set 2 indicated on MPIR2 1= Timer set 1 indicated on MPIR1 Timer number Number of the associated timer 142 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure The format of the timer entries is as follows: 31 24 Not used 23 16 Not used 15 8 timer_en timer_value[14:8] 7 0 timer_value[7:0] timer_en Timer enable The timer_en bit can be used by the SW to start/stop/pause the timer. Upon reaching timer_value = 0 the timer_en will be reset to 0 timer_value 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Timer value When timer_en is set to 1, the timer_value will be decremented every 12 x 512 x TCLOCK (245.8 S if fCLOCK = 25 MHz). The timer_value will stop at 7FFFH indicated by an interrupt status bit in isr1 for timer set 1 or in isr2 for timer set 2. Note: Internal register bit oamc[tim_set1_en] = 0 will disable all timers in set 1. Internal register bit time[tim_set2_en] = 0 will disable all timers in set 2. 6.2.5 Cell Insertion Buffer Read/write: Address 26020H to 2603FH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 16 x 32 bits: 1 cell x 16 doublewords MPADR[17:0] RMADR[15:0] 2603FH 301FH Not Used 301EH 2603CH Data Sheet 143 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure MPADR[17:0] RMADR[15:0] 2603BH 301DH ATM Cell Payload 3012H 26024H 26023H Not Used 26022H 3011H 26021H ATM Header 3010H 26020H The ATM header to be used for cell insertion has to be programmed at MPADR = 26020H. The format of the ATM Header entry is as follows: 31 24 VCI[3:0] CLP PTI[2:0] 23 16 VCI[11:4] 15 8 VPI[3:0] VCI[15:12] 7 0 GFC[3:0] or VPI[11:8] 6.2.6 VPI[7:4] Cell Extraction Buffer Read/write Address 26040H to 27FFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 8127 x 32 bits: 254 cells x 16 doublewords RMADR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 double_word [3:0] 0 1 Data Sheet 0 0 1 1 cell_nr[7:0] + 2 144 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure For reading the extraction buffer, refer to Chapter 4.10. MPADR[17:0] 27FFFH RMADR[15:0] Cell #254 3FFFH * 26060H Cell #2 3030H 2605FH 302FH Not Used 2605AH 302DH 26059H 302CH ATM Cell #1 Payload 26042H 3021H 26041H ATM Cell #1 Header 3020H 26040H The format of the ATM header entry is as follows: 31 24 VCI[3:0] CLP PTI[2:0] 23 16 VCI[11:4] 15 8 VPI[3:0] VCI[15:12] 7 0 GFC[3:0] or VPI[11:8] 6.2.7 VPI[7:4] Segmentation/ATM Receive Buffers Read/write Address 28000H to 2FFFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 16K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 channels x 4 cells x 16 doublewords Data Sheet 145 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure RMADR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 double_word [3:0] 0 1 6.2.7.1 0 1 port_nr [2:0] channel_nr [4:0] cell_nr [1:0] ATM Receive Buffer The SW does not need to access the ATM Receive Buffers. 6.2.7.2 Segmentation Buffer The ATM header to be used for each channel has to be programmed at the address given by: RMADR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 0 1 port_nr[2:0] ref_slot_nr[4:0] 00B 0000B 0 0 All other locations should never be accessed as the data changes continuously. The format of the ATM header entry in the cell insertion buffer is as follows: 31 24 VCI[3:0] PTI[2:0] 23 CLP 16 VCI[11:4] 15 8 VPI[3:0] VCI[15:12] 7 0 GFC[3:0] or VPI[11:8] 6.2.8 VPI[7:4] Reassembly/ATM Transmit Buffers Read/write Address 30000H to 3FFFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 32K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 channels x 8 cells x 16 doublewords Data Sheet 146 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Memory Structure RMADR 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 double_word [3:0] 0 1 1 port_nr [2:0] channel_nr [4:0] cell_nr [2:0] The SW does not need to access the Reassembly/ATM Transmit Buffers. Data Sheet 147 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7 Register Description The internal registers occupy the lowest addresses. Accesses to the internal registers are 16 bit oriented. Entry size = 16 bit Note: N = 0 .. 7 Table 32 Internal Registers MPADR Width Name Register 00000H + N 15 pcfN Port Configuration Register of Port N 00008H 16 acfg ASIC Configuration Register 00009H 3 oamc OAM Control Register 0000AH 6 catm OAM-Counter Enable Register for ATM Ports 0000BH 16 caal OAM-Counter Enable Register for AAL Ports 0000CH 16 bp32 Byte-pattern Register 3 and 2 0000DH 16 bp10 Byte-pattern Register 1 and 0 0000EH 16 atmc ATM Control Register 0000FH 16 rxid RX Idle/unassigned Cell Control Register 00010H 16 txid TX Idle/unassigned Cell Control Register 00011H 9 lpbc Loopback Control Register 00012H 8 cfil Cell Fill Register for Partially Filled Cells 00013H 16 imr1 Interrupt Mask Register 1 00014H 1 time Timer Enable Register 00015H 16 cdfs Cell Delineation FSM Status Register 00016H 9 vers Version Register 00017H 8 ckmo Clock Monitor Register 00018H 16 isr1 Interrupt Status Register 1 00019H 2 eis1 Extended Interrupt Status Register 1 0001AH 8 eis2 Extended Interrupt Status Register 2 0001BH 8 eis3 Extended Interrupt Status Register 3 0001CH 16 eis4 Extended Interrupt Status Register 4 0001DH 8 isr2 Interrupt Status 2 Register 0001EH 14 opmo Operation Mode Register 0001FH 16 ftcs FT Clock Select Register 00020H 16 cfvp1 Cell Filter VCI Pattern Register 1 Data Sheet 148 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description Table 32 Internal Registers (cont'd) MPADR Width Name Register 00021H 16 cfvm1 Cell Filter VCI Mask Register 1 00022H 16 cfvp2 Cell Filter VCI Pattern Register 2 00023H 16 cfvm2 Cell Filter VCI Mask Register 2 00024H 12 cfpt Cell Filter Payload Type Register 00025H 5 cmd Command Register 00026H 8 cfrp Cell Filter Read Pointer 00027H 16 thrshld Threshold Register 00028H 14 utconf UTOPIA Configuration Register 00029H 16 cas1 CAS 1 Register 0002AH 16 cas2 CAS 2 Register 0002BH 4 cas3 CAS 3 Register 0002CH 16 thrshp01 Threshold Register Ports 0 and 1 0002DH 16 thrshp23 Threshold Register Ports 2 and 3 0002EH 16 thrshp45 Threshold Register Ports 4 and 5 0002FH 16 thrshp67 Threshold Register Ports 6 and 7 00030H 16 eis0 Extended Interrupt Status Register 0 00031H 16 lcdtimer LCD Timer Register 00032H- 00100H Unused 00101H 11 irs Interrupt Source Register 00102H 11 irm Interrupt Mask Register 00103H 9 icrcconf ICRC Configuration Register 00104H+ N x 32 13 condN Configuration Downstream Register of Port N 00105H+ N x 32 7 irsN Interrupt Source of Port N 00106H+ N x 32 7 irmN Interrupt Mask of Port N 00107H+ N x 32 5 tsinN Test input Register of Port N 00108H+ N x 32 1 conuN Configuration Upstream Register of Port N 0010CH+ N x 32 14 avbN Average Buffer Filling of Port N 0010DH+ N x 32 4 asfN ACM Shift Factor of Port N 0010EH+ N x 32 13 tiniN Time of Initial Free Run of Port N 0010FH+ N x 32 12 treshN Threshold Out Of Lock Detection of Port N 00110H 6 per Parity Errors at Clock Recovery Interface 00111H 8 scri Synchronization Errors at Clock Recovery Interface Data Sheet 149 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description Table 32 Internal Registers (cont'd) MPADR Width Name Register 00112H 8 crifo ICRC Clock Recovery Interface FIFO Overflow 00113H 6 icrcv ICRC Version Register 00114H+ N x 32 8 sruN SRTS FIFO Underflow of Port N 00115H+ N x 32 8 sroN SRTS FIFO Overflow of Port N 00116H+ N x 32 8 srrN SRTS Generator Reset of Port N 00117H+ N x 32 8 sriN SRTS Invalid Value Processed of Port N 00118H+ N x 32 8 atlN ACM Data Too Late of Port N 00119H+ N x 32 3 oolN Out of Lock Register of Port N 0011AH+ N x 32 3 statN Status Register of ICRC of Port N 0011BH+ N x 32 5 tsoutN Test Output Register of Port N Data Sheet 150 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.1 Port Configuration Registers (pcfN) Read/write Address 00000H + N Reset value: 0000. 15 8 p_cell_ disc Not used p_thr_m[1:0] p_cas p_atm p_ces p_acm 7 p_srts 0 p_slp p_cell_disc p_thr_m p_cas p_dlp p_rx_act p_rx_em p_tx_act p_tx_mfs Port Cell Discard Enable X= When p_atm = 0 or acfg.a_hec_mode = 0 0= Port in IMA mode: No cell discard upon detection of uncorrectable HEC error. The MSB in the UDF field of the ATM cell header at UTOPIA interface will indicate the results of the HEC check 1= Port in standard mode: Cell discard upon detection of uncorrectable HEC error Port threshold mode This bit is relevant in ATM mode (p_atm=1) only. 00 = Port specific backpressure to UTOPIA is disabled. Entering this value causes a reset of the corresponding filling level counter. Resetting this counter during operation may result in an inappropriate backpressure. 01 = Port specific backpressure to UTOPIA is enabled Crossing the value defined in thrspN will result in port specific backpressure. Values can range from 0 to 255 cells. 10 = Port specific backpressure to UTOPIA is enabled Crossing the value defined in thrspN will result in port specific backpressure. The amount of bytes defining the threshold value equals 53 * C + B. With C representing the 2 most significant bits of thrspN and B representing the 6 least significant bits of thrspN. Values can range from 0 to 222 bytes. 11 = Port specific backpressure to UTOPIA is disabled Port CAS enable 0= Data Sheet p_ulp Disabled 151 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 1= p_atm p_ces p_acm p_srts p_slp p_ulp p_dlp p_rx_act Data Sheet Enabled Port ATM mode 0= AAL (CES) mode port 1= ATM (PHY) mode port Port circuit emulation service X= When p_atm = 1 and for PXB 4219 version 0= Structured (N x 64 kbit/s) 1= Unstructured Port ACM enable X= When p_atm = 1 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Port SRTS enable For the PXB4220 this bit enables SRTS clock recovery. This is only useful for AAL ports in unstructured CES. For the PXB4221 this bit is tied to "0". Writing "1" has no effect. X= When p_atm = 1 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Port serial loopback enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Port upstream UTOPIA loopback (works even if UTOPIA interface is disabled) 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Port downstream UTOPIA loopback 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Port receive activate 0= Disabled 1= Enabled 152 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description p_rx_em p_tx_act p_tx_mfs Port receive emergency mode Enables the automatic switch over to emergency mode 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Port transmit activate 0= Disabled (Framer outputs tristated) 1= Enabled Port transmit multiframe signal at pin FTMFS E1/T1 = 0: 0= T1 Superframe mode (12 frames = 1.5 ms) 1= T1 Extended superframe mode (24 frames = 3 ms) E1/T1 = 1: Data Sheet 0= E1 Double frame mode (2 frames = 250 s) 1= E1 CRC multiframe mode (16 frames = 2 ms) 153 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.2 ASIC Configuration Register (acfg) Read/write Address 00008H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 a_icrc_ dwn a_hec_ algor a_hec_ mode a_sw_ reset a_ut_en a_dummy _rts[3] a_ur_en a_crv_en 7 0 a_dummy_rts[2:0] a_icrc_dwn a_emg_bpslct[1:0] a_ovf_ cnt_en a_ptr_ prty a_even_ pck ICRC power down Once the SRTS block is switched off, it can only be enabled by hardware reset of the whole device. 0= Enabled 1= Disabled a_hec_algor HEC detection, correction a_hec_ mode a_sw_reset a_ut_en a_ur_en Data Sheet 0= HEC algorithm according to ITU-T 1= HEC algorithm according to ATM Forum Handling in case of faulty HEC 0= Standard mode: Cell discard upon detection of uncorrectable HEC error 1= as defined in pcfN.p_cell_disc Software reset Reset registers 0000H to 0031H including this bit. 0= Normal 1= Reset UTOPIA transmit enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled UTOPIA receive enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled 154 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description a_crv_en Clock recovery interface enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled a_dummy_ rts Dummy RTS value Dummy RTS value that will be transmitted in the first and second SRTS period after start of segmentation. a_emg_ bpslct Emergency byte-pattern select a_ovf_cnt_ en a_ptr_prty 00 = Byte-pattern 0, defined in bp10[bp0] selected 01 = Byte-pattern 1, defined in bp10[bp1] selected 10 = Byte-pattern 2, defined in bp32[bp2] selected 11 = Byte-pattern 3, defined in bp32[bp3] selected Output queue overflow counter enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled SDT pointer even parity generation 0= Disabled: Fixed value in bit 7 of pointer field: "0". 1= Enabled (recommended) a_even_pck Even parity check for internal/external RAM and UTOPIA Data Sheet 0= Odd parity check enabled (default operation) The parity checkers expect the normal parity. 1= Even parity check enabled The parity checkers expect the inverse parity. This mode tests the proper operation of the parity generators/checkers. 155 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.3 OAM Control Register (oamc) Read/write Address 00009H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used tim_ set1_en dest_ read oam_ act tim_set1_en Timer set 1 enable dest_read oam_act Data Sheet 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Destructive read mode 0= Disabled 1= Enabled: OAM counter values in the external RAM are reset after being read by the micro-processor. (Only accepted if "oam_act" = 1) OAM active 0= The protocol monitoring is disabled and the microprocessor can read and write the complete external RAM for test. 1= The protocol monitoring is enabled and the RAM arbiter grants both the protocol monitoring and the microprocessor access to the external RAM. Reading any address of Interrupt Queue by the microprocessor always yields the first interrupt in the queue. 156 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.4 OAM-Counter Enable Register for ATM Ports (catm) Read/write Address 0000AH Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 5 0 Not used cnt_atm_en Data Sheet cnt_atm_en[5:0] OAM-counter enable for ATM ports X= When pcfN[p_atm] = 0 0= Disabled 1= Enabled 157 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.5 OAM-Counter Enable Register for AAL Ports (caal) Read/write Address 0000BH Reset value: 0000H 15 8 cnt_aal_en[15:8] 7 0 cnt_aal_en[7:0] cnt_aal_en Data Sheet OAM-counter enable for AAL ports X= When pcfN[p_atm] = 1 0= Disabled 1= Enabled 158 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.6 Byte-Pattern Register bp3 and bp2 (bp32) Read/write Address 0000CH Reset value: FFFFH 15 8 bp3[7:0] 7 0 bp2[7:0] bp3 Byte-pattern 3 bp2 Byte-pattern 2 Data Sheet 159 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.7 Byte-Pattern Register bp1 and bp0 (bp10) Read/write Address 0000DH Reset value: FFFFH 15 8 bp1[7:0] 7 0 bp0[7:0] bp1 Byte-pattern 1 bp0 Byte-pattern 0 Data Sheet 160 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.8 ATM Control Register (atmc) Read/write Address 0000EH Reset value: 7655H 15 8 alpha[3:0] delta[3:0] 7 0 coset[7:0] alpha Number of consecutive incorrect HEC (SYNC HUNT) delta Number of consecutive correct HEC (PRESYNC SYNC) coset Coset value x-ored with HEC Data Sheet 161 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.9 RX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (rxid) Read/write Address 0000FH Reset value: 0101H 15 8 prg_rx_hd[7:4] prg_rx_hd[3:0] 7 0 msk_rx_hd[7:0] prg_rx_hd Programmable RX idle/unassigned cell header octet 1[7:4] 00H according to I.361 prg_rx_hd Programmable RX idle/unassigned cell header octet 4[3:0] 01H according to I.361 msk_rx_hd Mask RX idle/unassigned cell header bits Each bit masks the corresponding bit in prg_rx_hd 0= Not masked: 1= Masked Note: Other header bits must be zero Data Sheet 162 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.10 TX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (txid) Read/write Address 00010H Reset value: 016AH 15 8 prg_tx_hd[7:4] prg_tx_hd[3:0] 7 0 prg_tx_pl[7:0] prg_tx_hd Programmable TX idle/unassigned cell header octet 1[7:4] 00H according to I.361 prg_tx_hd Programmable TX idle/unassigned cell header octet 4[3:0] 01H according to I.361 prg_tx_pl Programmable TX idle/unassigned cell payload octet 6AH according to I.432 Note: Other header bits are fixed to zero Data Sheet 163 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.11 Loopback Control Register (lpbc) Read/write Address 00011H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used tslp 7 tulp 0 tdlp vci_flt_ ulp vci_val_ulp[4:0] t tslp tulp tdlp vci_flt_ulp vci_val_ulp Transparent serial loop 0= Non-transparent 1= Transparent Transparent upstream UTOPIA loop X= When pcfN[p_atm] = 1 0= Non-transparent 1= Transparent Transparent downstream UTOPIA loop 0= Non-transparent 1= Transparent VCI filter enable for upstream UTOPIA loop 0= Disabled (all VCIs are looped) 1= Enabled (VCI selected by vci_val_ulp is looped) 5 LSB of the VCI value (i.e. channel number) to be looped on upstream UTOPIA loop Note: Transparent loop: Data is looped and forwarded. Non-transparent loop: Data is looped. Note: For ATM ports with upstream UTOPIA loopback (pcfN[p_atm] = 1 and pcfN[p_ulp] = 1), all cells are looped regardless of their VCI value. The vci_flt_ulp and vci_val_ulp[4:0] bits are don't care. Data Sheet 164 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.12 Cell Fill Register for Partially Filled Cells (cfil) Read/write Address 00012H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 cfil[7:0] cfil Data Sheet Dummy fill octet for partially filled cells 165 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.13 Interrupt Mask Register 1 (imr1) Read/write Address 00013H Reset value: FFFFH 15 8 imr1[15:8] 7 0 imr1[7:0] imr1 Data Sheet Each bit masks the corresponding bit in isr1 0= Not masked 1= Masked 166 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.14 Timer Enable Register (time) Read/write Address 00014H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used tim_set2 _en tim_set2_en Timer set 2 enable Data Sheet 0= Disabled 1= Enabled 167 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.15 Cell Delineation FSM Status Register (cdfs) Read only Address 00015H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 status_p7[1:0] status_p6[1:0] status_p5[1:0] 7 0 status_p3[1:0] status_pN status_p4[1:0] status_p2[1:0] status_p1[1:0] status_p0[1:0] Cell Delineation FSM status of port N XX = When pcfN[p_atm] = 0 Data Sheet 00 = Hunt 01 = Presync 10 = Sync 168 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.16 Read only Version Register (vers) Address 00016H 15 9 Not used mtypsel 7 ec mtypsel ec e1/t1 version Data Sheet 8 0 e1/t1 version[5:0] Microcontroller type select 0= Microcontroller Interface runs in Intel Mode 1= Microcontroller Interface runs in Motorola Mode Status of EC pin 0= Echo Cancellation mode(EC) 1= Normal operation mode Status of E1/T1 pin 0= T1 mode 1= E1 mode Version of IWE8 Value of 011 010B for Version 3.2 Value of 011 011B for Version 3.3 Value of 011 100B for Version 3.4 169 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.17 Clock Monitor Register (ckmo) Read only Address 00017H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 frclk_failure[7:0] frclk_failure FRCLK clock failure on port N Bit remains active only as long as a clock failure on FRCLK is detected. Data Sheet 0= False 1= True 170 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.18 Interrupt Status Register 1 (isr1) Read only, Address 00018H Reset value: 0000H 15 iq_ne 8 eis4 eis3 eis2 eis1 eis0 Not used 7 Not used iq_ne eis4 eis3 eis2 eis1 eis0 ut_soc Data Sheet 0 ut_soc ut_par ex_par crv_par oq_ovf eq_ovf ck_eme Interrupt queue not empty 0= False 1= True A bit is set in eis4 0= False 1= True A bit is set in eis3 0= False 1= True A bit is set in eis2 0= False 1= True A bit is set in eis1 0= False 1= True A bit is set in eis0 0= False 1= True UTOPIA start of cell error, indicates if SOC is activated too late or twice within one cell cycle. (corresponds to transmit direction in slave mode and receive direction in master mode). 0= False 1= True 171 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description ut_par Parity error on UTOPIA bus ex_par Parity error on external RAM In order to prevent external RAM parity errors, the external RAM should be written completely during board initialization by the microprocessor. crv_par oq_ovf eq_ovf ck_eme 0= False 1= True Parity error on clock recovery interface 0= False 1= True Output queue overflow 0= False 1= True Error queue overflow 0= False 1= True Emergency mode state change on one of the emergency mode enabled ports (see ckmo) 0= False 1= True Note: Bits 6:0 are used for tracing error events. They are set on the occurrence of an error event and reset by a microprocessor read operation. Bits 15:10 Bits are reset upon reading of the interrupt generating register. Data Sheet 172 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.19 Extended Interrupt Status 1 Register (eis1) Destructive read Address 00019H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used cf_fifo_full cf_fifo_n_ empty Data Sheet cf_fifo_ n_empty cf_fifo_ full Cell filter FIFO full 0= False 1= True Cell filter FIFO not empty 0= False 1= True 173 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.20 Extended Interrupt Status 2 Register (eis2) Destructive read Address 0001AH Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 rts_overflow[7:0] rts_overflow RTS buffer overflow of IWE core at port N Applicable for AAL ports in unstructured CES mode with SRTS. Data Sheet X= When pcfN[p_atm] = 1 or pcfN[p_ces] = 0 or pcfN[p_srts] = 0 0= False 1= True 174 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.21 Extended Interrupt Status 3 Register (eis3) Destructive read Address 0001BH Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 tim_set1_exp[7:0] tim_set1_ exp Data Sheet Timer of set 1 expired Each bit indicates if the corresponding timer expired 0= False 1= True 175 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.22 Extended Interrupt Status 4 Register (eis4) Destructive read Address 0001CH Reset value: 0000H 15 8 ocd_end[7:0] 7 0 ocd_start[7:0] ocd_end ocd_start Data Sheet End of OCD (Out of cell delineation) state at port N X= When pcfN[p_atm] = 0 0= False 1= True Start of OCD (Out of cell delineation) state at port N X= When pcfN[p_atm] = 0 0= False 1= True 176 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.23 Interrupt Status Register 2 (isr2) Destructive read Address 0001DH Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 tim_set2_exp[7:0] t tim_set2_ exp Data Sheet Timer of timer set 2 expired Each bit indicates if the corresponding timer expired 0= False 1= True 177 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.24 Operation Mode Register (opmo) Read/write Address 0001EH Reset value 1100H 15 8 Not used symn rts_gen rts_eval bufthr[3:1] 7 bufthr0 symn rts_gen rts_eval 0 tfpp rfpp ftri frri om[1:0] cbb SYMn mode This bit is relevant only in SYM2 and SYM8 0= FRMFB[0] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of all ports. FRMFB[1:7] are unused 1= FRMFB[N] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of corresponding ports RTS generation 0= Pin SDI is used for RTS 1= RTS data are generated by ICRC RTS evaluation 0= Pins FTCKO are used as transmit clock (all FTCKO[0:7] are input pins) 1= Clock of ICRC is used as transmit clock and is also switched to FTCKO pins (FTCKO[0:7] all are output pins) bufthr Buffer threshold Determines the threshold for the ATM Transmit Buffer. If the buffer level remains under the threshold the signal ATBTC will be activated. tfpp Transmit frame pulse polarity valid for GIM rfpp 0= FTMFS is active low 1= FTMFS is active high Receive frame pulse polarity valid for GIM, SYM8 and SYM2 0= Data Sheet FRMFB is active low 178 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 1= ftri frri FRMFB is active high Framer transmit rising edge valid for GIM 0= FTDAT outputs are clocked with the falling edge of FTCKO 1= FTDAT outputs are clocked with the rising edge of FTCKO Framer receive rising edge valid for GIM: 0= FRDAT inputs are sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK 1= FRDAT inputs are sampled with the rising edge of FRCLK valid for SYM2: om cbb 1) 0= FRDAT inputs are sampled with the falling edge of RFCLK FTDAT outputs are clocked with the rising edge of RFCLK 1= FRDAT inputs are sampled with the rising edge of RFCLK FTDAT outputs are clocked with the falling edge of RFCLK Operation Mode 00 = FAM: FALC mode FTCKO and FRCLK running at 8.192 MHz 01 = GIM: Generic Interface mode1) FTCKO and FRCLK running at 2.048 (E1) or 1.544 (T1) MHz 10 = SYM8: E1 synchronous mode (RFCLK = 8.192 MHz) 11 = SYM2: E1 synchronous mode (RFCLK = 2.048 MHz) Clock Boost Bypass 0= Normal operation: the external clock at RFCLK in internally doubled to serve as reference clock for the internal DPLL 1= Clock boost function bypassed Make sure that no clocks are applied to the transmitter when switching to GIM. Data Sheet 179 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.25 FT Clock Select Register (ftcs) Read/write Address 0001FH Reset value 0000H 15 8 ftck7[1:0] ftck6[1:0] ftck5[1:0] ftck4[1:0] 7 0 ftck3[1:0] ftcki ftck2[1:0] ftck1[1:0] ftck0[1:0] Clock Source for framer transmit interface valid for FAM and GIM 00 = FTCKOi if opmo[rts_eval]=0 Recovered Clock of ICRC if opmo[rts_eval] = 1 01 = FRCLKi (opmo[rts_eval] = 1 is required) 10 = Derived from RFCLK (opmo[rts_eval] = 1 is required) 11 = No clock Note: Register opmo has to be set before ftcs is configured. Data Sheet 180 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.26 Cell Filter VCI Pattern 1 Register (cfvp1) Read/write Address 20H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 vci_pattern1[15:8] 7 0 vci_pattern1[7:0] vci_pattern1 First VCI pattern the cell header is compared with. Data Sheet 181 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.27 Cell Filter VCI Mask 1 Register (cfvm1) Read/write Address 00021H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 vci_mask1[15:8] 7 0 vci_mask1[7:0] vci_mask1 Data Sheet Each bit masks the corresponding bit in cfvp1 0= Not masked 1= Masked 182 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.28 Cell Filter VCI Pattern 2 Register (cfvp2) Read/write Address 00022H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 vci_pattern2[15:8] 7 0 vci_pattern2[7:0] vci_pattern2 Second VCI pattern the cell header is compared with. Data Sheet 183 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.29 Cell Filter VCI Mask 2 Register (cfvm2) Read/write Address 00023H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 vci_mask2[15:8] 7 0 vci_mask2[7:0] vci_mask2 Data Sheet Each bit masks the corresponding bit in cfvp2 0= Not masked 1= Masked 184 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.30 Cell Filter Payload Type Register (cfpt) Read/write Address 00024H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used pt_pattern2[2:0] pt_mask 2[2] 7 0 pt_mask2[1:0] pt_mask1 pt_pattern1[2:0] pt_mask1[2:0] Each bit masks the corresponding bit in pt_pattern1. 0= Not masked 1= Masked pt_pattern1 First PT pattern the cell header is compared with. pt_mask2 Each bit masks the corresponding bit in pt_pattern2. pt_pattern2 Data Sheet 0= Not masked 1= Masked Second PT pattern the cell header is compared with. 185 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.31 Command Register (cmd) Read/write Address 00025H Reset value 0000H 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used vci1_comp vci2_comp pt1_comp pt2_comp insert_cell Data Sheet insert_ cell pt2_ comp pt1_ comp vci2_ comp vci1_ comp VCI comparison corresponding to register cfvp1 and cfvm1. 0= Disabled 1= Enabled VCI comparison corresponding to register cfvp2 and cfvm2. 0= Disabled 1= Enabled PT comparison corresponding to fields pt_pattern1 and pt_mask1 in register cfpt. 0= Disabled 1= Enabled PT comparison corresponding to fields pt_pattern2 and pt_mask2 in register cfpt. 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Cell insertion via microprocessor. A cell will be inserted in the data stream as soon as possible; when finished this bit will be reset. 0= Disabled 1= Enabled 186 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.32 Cell Filter Read Pointer Register (cfrp) Read/write Address 00026H Reset value 0002H 15 8 Not used 7 0 rdptr[7:0] rdptr Read Pointer for the Cell Extraction Buffer 02H to FFH Data Sheet This value is a pointer to the current address, at which the microprocessor will read the next extracted cell from the Cell Extraction Buffer 187 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.33 Threshold Register (thrshld) Read/write Address 00027H Reset value 00FFH 15 8 Not used 7 0 threshold[7:0] threshold Global ATM transmit buffer threshold for discarding cells 00H to FFH Data Sheet If the amount of cells stored in the ATM transmit buffer crosses this value cells will be discarded. 188 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.34 UTOPIA Configuration Register (utconf) Read/write Address 00028H Reset value 0001H 15 8 Not used utrange[2:0] utprtyen utbaseadr[4:3] 7 0 utbaseadr[2:0] utrange utprtyen utlevel utmaster mapping_mode[2:0] UTOPIA Port Range Controls the supported port range if the device is configured as UTOPIA level 2 PHY-Layer (utlevel=0, utmaster=0, mapping_mode=000B) 000 = Ports 0 to 7 enabled 001 = Port 0 enabled 010 = Ports 0 and 1 enabled 011 = Ports 0 to 2 enabled 100 = Ports 0 to 3 enabled 101 = Ports 0 to 4 enabled 110 = Ports 0 to 5 enabled 111 = Ports 0 to 6 enabled UTOPIA parity check enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled utbaseadr UTOPIA base address Defines the base address under which the PHY-Layer is accessible. User has to set this value to 0 if device utlevel = 1. utlevel UTOPIA interface level In Master mode only UTOPIA level 1 is available. utmaster Data Sheet 0= UTOPIA level 2 1= UTOPIA level 1 UTOPIA Slave/Master configuration 0= Slave mode (PHY-Layer) 1= Master mode (ATM-Layer) 189 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description mapping _mode Data Sheet Mapping of the "port_nr" associated with the currently transferred cell into the UTOPIA datastream 000 = Disabled 001 = Mapping to UDF[2:0] field in ATM header 010 = Mapping toVCI[7:5] field in ATM header 011 = Mapping toVCI[15:13] field in ATM header 100 = Mapping toVPI[7:5] field in ATM header 101 = Mapping toGFC[3:1] field in ATM header 190 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.35 CAS 1 Register (cas1) Read/write Address 00029H Reset value: BBBBH 15 8 cas0port3[3:0] cas0port2[3:0] 7 0 cas0port1[3:0] cas0port0[3:0] cas0port0 E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 0 (unused in T1 mode) cas0port1 E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 1 (unused in T1 mode) cas0port2 E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 2 (unused in T1 mode) cas0port3 E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 3 (unused in T1 mode) Data Sheet 191 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.36 CAS 2 Register (cas2) Read/write Address 0002AH Reset value: BBBBH 15 8 cas0port7[3:0] cas0port6[3:0] 7 0 cas0port5[3:0] cas0port4[3:0] cas0port4 E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 4 (unused in T1 mode) cas0port5 E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 5 (unused in T1 mode) cas0port6 E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 6 (unused in T1 mode) cas0port7 E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 7 (unused in T1 mode) Data Sheet 192 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.37 CAS 3 Register (cas3) Read/write Address 0002BH Reset value: 000DH 15 8 Not used 7 0 Not used cas_idle Data Sheet cas_idle CAS idle pattern for unused timeslots of the Tx frame 193 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.38 Threshold Register for Ports 0 and 1 (thrsp01) Read/write Address 0002CH Reset value: FFFFH 15 8 p_odd[7:0] 7 0 p_even[7:0] p_odd Port 1 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx p_even Port 0 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx Data Sheet 194 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.39 Threshold Register for Ports 2 and 3 (thrsp23) Read/write Address 0002DH Reset value: FFFFH 15 8 p_odd[7:0] 7 0 p_even[7:0] p_odd Port 3 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx p_even Port 2 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx Data Sheet 195 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.40 Threshold Register for Ports 4 and 5 (thrsp45) Read/write Address 02EH Reset value: FFFFH 15 8 p_odd[7:0] 7 0 p_even[7:0] p_odd Port 5 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx p_even Port 4 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx Data Sheet 196 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.41 Threshold Register for Ports 6 and 7 (thrsp67) Read/write Address 0002FH Reset value: FFFFH 15 8 p_odd[7:0] 7 0 p_even[7:0] p_odd Port 7 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx p_even Port 6 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx Data Sheet 197 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.42 Extended Interrupt Status 0 Register (eis0) Destructive Read Address 00030H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 lcd_end[7:0] 7 0 lcd_start[7:0] lcd_end lcd_start Data Sheet End of LCD detect on port N 0= False 1= True Start of LCD detect on port N 0= False 1= True 198 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.43 LCD Timer Register (lcdtimer) Read/write Address 00031H Reset value: FFFFH 15 8 lcd_val[14:7] 7 0 lcd_val[6:0] lcd_dis lcd_val LCD timer preload value The port specific LCD timer is pre-loaded with 128 * lcd_val and clocked with CLOCK. After expiration an interrupt is issued in eis0. lcd_dis LCD timer disable Data Sheet 0= Enabled 1= Disabled 199 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.44 Interrupt Source Register (irs) Read only Address 00101H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 Not used irs7 irs6 7 irs4 irsN crifo scri per irs5 0 irs3 irs2 irs1 irs0 crifo scri per IRS register of port N These bits indicate if a bit is set in irsN 0= False 1= True Clock recovery interface FIFO overflow This bit indicates if a bit is set in crifo 0= False 1= True Synchronization errors at the internal clock recovery interface This bit indicates if a bit is set in scri 0= False 1= True Parity errors at the clock recovery interface. This bit indicates if a bit is set in per 0= False 1= True Bits are reset after reading the corresponding registers. Data Sheet 200 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.45 Interrupt Mask (irm) Read/Write Address 00102H Reset value: 07FFH 15 8 Not used irm7 irm6 7 irm4 irmN crifo scri per Data Sheet irm5 0 irm3 irm2 irm1 irm0 crifo scri per Each bit masks the corresponding irsN in irs 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit crifo in irs 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit scri in irs. 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit per in irs 0= Not masked 1= Masked 201 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.46 Internal Clock (icrcconf) Recovery Circuit Configuration Register Read/Write Address 00103H Reset value: 0020H 15 8 Not used gim 7 ds1 gim ds1 parc pdcri srst lptd Data Sheet 0 parc pdcri srst lptd lptu lprd lpru Generic interface mode 0= FAM: 8.192 MHz is expected/generated. 1= GIM: 2.048 MHz (E1) or 1.544 MHz (T1) expected/generated. DS1 Mode 0= E1: The receive clocks are divided to 2.048 MHz. Output clocks are 8.192 MHz in case of FAM or 2.048 MHz in case of GIM. 1= T1: The receive clocks are divided to 1.544 MHz. Output clocks are 8.192 MHz in case of FAM or 1.544 MHz in case of GIM. Parity Check Inverts all parity bits in the ICRC. All enabled parity checkers will generate interrupts 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Power Down Clock Recovery Interface 0= Normal operation 1= The internal clock recovery interface is put in power down mode. No data is received, no errors are generated and the parity check is disabled. Software Reset The bit srst is set by the software, but reset by the ICRC. Reading this bit will always give the Reset value: "0". 0= Normal operation 1= Reset ICRC Loop back clock recovery interface transmitted data downstream 202 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description lptu lprd lpru Data Sheet 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Loop back clock recovery interface transmitted data upstream 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Loop back clock recovery interface received data downstream 0= Disabled 1= Enabled Loop back clock recovery interface received data upstream 0= Disabled 1= Enabled 203 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.47 Configuration Register Downstream of Port N (condN) Read/Write Address 00104H + N x 32 Reset value: 0840H 15 8 not used tur[5:1] 7 tur(0] 0 pwd lgc lc8 lgs lpcr srt acm tur Tuning range select of port N The tuning range of PLL-ACM is limited to: (frequency deviation of pin RFCLK in ppm) +/- ((4*tur) +/-5%)ppm. pwd Power down of port N lgc lc8 lgs lpcr srt, acm 0= Normal operation 1= Power down mode. No RTS values and no transmit clock are generated. Loop back generated clock 0= Normal operation 1= The clock generated by the PLL is looped into the RTS generator. Loop back clock 8.192 MHz 0= Normal operation 1= The receive clock is looped to the transmit output of the ICRC. Loop back generated RTS 0= Normal operation 1= Generated RTS values are looped into the SRTS Receive FIFO. Loop back clock recovery Interface 0= Normal operation 1= The clock recovery interface is bypassed. RTS values from the frame receiver are looped into the SRTS Transmit FIFO. Selectors for the clock generation algorithm 00 = Data Sheet The PLL is put in power down mode, and a free running clock is generated. In case pwd is set, all circuits of the port, including the RTS generator are disabled, no output clock is generated and all error counters are reset. 204 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description Data Sheet 01 = Transmit clock generation of this port is based on the adaptive clock algorithm 10 = Transmit clock generation of this port is based on the SRTS algorithm. 11 = Transmit clock generation of this port is based on both algorithms. The tuning range of PLL-ACM can not be reduced (tur), because PLL-ACM has to accept the jitter passed through or generated in PLL-SRTS. 205 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.48 Read only Interrupt Source of Port N (irsN) Address 00105H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 not used srrn tsoutn srun sron srin atln ooln 0 srrn tsoutn srun sron srin atln ooln A bit is set in srrn. 0= False 1= True A bit is set in tsoutN. 0= False 1= True A bit is set in sruN 0= False 1= True A bit is set in sroN. 0= False 1= True A bit is set in sriN. 0= False 1= True A bit is set in atlN. 0= False 1= True A bit is set in oolN. 0= False 1= True Bits are reset upon reading of the interrupt generating register. Data Sheet 206 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.49 Interrupt Mask of Port N (irmN) Read/Write Address 00106H + N x 32 Reset value: 007FH 15 8 not used 7 not used srrn tsoutn srun sron srin atln ooln Data Sheet 0 srrn tsoutn srun sron srin atln ooln This bit masks the bit srrN in irsN 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit tsoutN in irsN 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit sruN in irsN. 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit sroN in irsN 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit sriN in irsN 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit atlN in irsN 0= Not masked 1= Masked This bit masks the bit oolN in irsN 0= Not masked 1= Masked 207 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.50 Test Input of Port N (tsinN) Read/Write Address 00107H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 not used rtsi[3:0] ena rtsi RTS Input value of port N ena Test Input Enable Disconnect the RTS generator from the transmit FIFO. Each write command to this register injects the value rtsi into the transmit FIFO. 0= Disabled 1= Enabled: Successive writes to this register should have a minimum distance of 8 x 32 x TCLOCK. This is the (maximum) time needed to transmit the value rtsi to the clock recovery. In case bit lgs of register condN is set, this waiting time is not necessary. Data Sheet 208 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.51 Configuration Register Upstream Direction of Port N (conuN) Read/Write Address 00108H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 not used rtsg . rtsg Data Sheet RTS generator enable 0= Disabled 1= Enabled 209 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.52 Average Buffer Filling of Port N (avbN) Read/Write Address 0010CH + N x 32 Reset value: 2000H 15 8 not used avb[13:8] 7 0 avb[7:0] avb Data Sheet Average buffer filling of port N This field defines the number of bytes ACM should try to keep in the data buffer of the clock recovery. This value should correspond with the number of bytes the clock recovery initially stores in the data buffer. 210 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.53 ACM Shift Factor of Port N (asfN) Read/Write Address 0010DH + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 not used dir ampl Data Sheet dir ampl[2:0] Direction of shifting 0= shift left = amplification 1= shift right = attenuation Amplitude of shifting This defines the loop-gain of PLL-ACM. It is equivalent to a multiplication with (or a division by) 2ampl. 211 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.54 Time of Initial Free Run of Port N (tiniN) Read/Write Address 0010EH + N x 32 Reset value: 0400H 15 8 not used tini[12:8] 7 0 tini[7:0] tini[12:0] Time of initial free run of port N Data Sheet 212 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.55 Threshold Out of Lock Detection of Port N (tresh) Read/Write Address 0010FH + N x 32 Reset value: 0111H 15 8 not used tr_filt[3:0] 7 0 tr_srts[3:0] tr_acm[3:0] tr_filt Threshold for out of lock detection of PLL-FILTER If more than tr_filt out of lock detections during 16 SRTS periods (128 ATM cells) are made, oolN[olf] is set tr_srts Threshold for out of lock detection of PLL-SRTS If more than tr_srts out of lock detections during 16 SRTS periods (128 ATM cells) are made, oolN[ols] is set tr_acm Threshold for out of lock detection of PLL-ACM If more than tr_acm out of lock detections during 16 ATM cells are made, oolN[ola] is set. Data Sheet 213 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.56 ICRC Parity Errors at Clock Recovery Interface (per) Destructive read Address 00110H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 perd[7:0] 7 0 peru[7:0] perd Parity Errors at the Clock Recovery Interface Downstream Pin SDOD This field counts the amount of parity errors at the internal clock recovery interface. In case there are more than 255 errors, the value is kept peru Parity Errors at the Clock Recovery Interface Upstream Pin SDI This field counts the amount of parity errors at the internal clock recovery interface. In case there are more than 255 errors, the value is kept Note: A synchronization error (scri) generates a random number of parity errors Data Sheet 214 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.57 ICRC Synchronization Errors at Clock Recovery Interface (scri) Destructive read Address 00111H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 scri[7:0] scri Synchronization Error at the Clock Recovery Interface This field counts the amount of synchronization errors at the internal clock recovery interface. In case there are more than 255 errors, the value is kept Note: A synchronization error (scri) generates a random number of parity errors (per) Data Sheet 215 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.58 ICRC Clock Recovery Interface FIFO Overflow (crifo) Destructive read Address 00112H Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 crifo[7:0] crifo Data Sheet Clock Recovery Interface FIFO Overflow This field counts the number of times the SRTS transmit FIFO overflows. In case there are more than 255 errors, the value is kept 216 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.59 ICRC Version Register (icrcv) Read only Address 00113H Reset value: 0034H 15 8 not used 7 0 not used ver Version Number rel Release Number ver[2:0] rel[2:0] Note: The version and release number are defined as: IWE8 V<ver>.<rel> Data Sheet 217 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.60 SRTS Receive FIFO Underflow of Port N (sruN) Destructive read Address 00114H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 sru[7:0] sru Data Sheet SRTS Receive FIFO underflow of port N This field counts the amount of underflows of the SRTS Receive FIFO. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value. 218 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.61 SRTS Receive FIFO Overflow of Port N (sroN) Destructive read Address 00115H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 sro[7:0] sro Data Sheet SRTS Receive FIFO overflow of port N This field counts the amount of overflows of the SRTS Receive FIFO. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value. 219 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.62 SRTS Generator Reset of Port N (srrN) Destructive read Address 00116H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 srr[7:0] srr Data Sheet SRTS generator reset command counter of port N This field counts the number of times the SRTS generator is reset by frame receiver 1. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value. 220 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.63 SRTS Invalid Value Processed of Port N (sriN) Destructive read Address 00117H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 sri[7:0] sri Data Sheet SRTS invalid value processed counter of port N This field counts the number of times PLL-SRTS and PLL-FILTER went in hold over due to invalid RTS values. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value. 221 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.64 ACM Data Too Late of Port N (atlN) Destructive read Address 00118H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 atl[7:0] atl Data Sheet ACM data too late error counter of port N This field counts the number of times the next ACM data arrived more than 10 ms too late. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value. 222 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.65 Out Of Lock Register of Port N (oolN) Destructive read Address 00119H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 not used olf ols ola Data Sheet olf ols ola PLL-Filter out of lock at port N This bit indicates that the number of times PLL-FILTER went out of lock exceeds treshN[tr_filt]. 0= False 1= True PLL-SRTS out of lock at port N This bit indicates that the number of times PLL-SRTS went out of lock exceeds treshN[tr_srts]. 0= False 1= True PLL-ACM out of lock at port N This bit indicates that the number of times PLL-ACM went out of lock exceeds treshN[tr_acm]. 0= False 1= True 223 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.66 Status Register of Port N (statN) Destructive read Address 0011AH + N x 32 Reset value: 0001H 15 8 not used 7 0 not used max hov frr Data Sheet max hov frr Maximum frequency deviation Indicates that PLL-ACM is clipped at its maximum frequency deviation. 0= False 1= True Hold over Indicates that PLL-SRTS is put in hold over because of error conditions in the SRTS processing. 0= False 1= True Free running clock Indicates that PLL-SRTS or PLL-ACM is put in free run during start-up. 0= False 1= True 224 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Register Description 7.67 Test Output Register of Port N (tsoutN) Destructive read Address 0011BH + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 8 not used 7 0 not used rtso[3:0] dav rtso RTS test output value of port N If bit ena from register tsinN is set: RTS value at the output of the SRTS Receive FIFO of this port. dav Data available SRTS Receive FIFO of this port is not empty 0= False 1= True Note: By verifying bit dav, the SRTS Receive FIFO can be read completely by successive reads of this register. Data Sheet 225 2003-01-20 Figure 38 Data Sheet E1 / T1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 om 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 10 11 x 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 10 11 x rts_ ftcki eval RFCLK FRCLK[0:7] FTCKO[0:7] 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz 01 01 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz FRCLK[0:7] 10 01 32.768 MHz 8.192 MHz 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 50ppm 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ICRC 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 130ppm 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ICRC 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ECRC 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz 01 01 32.768 MHz OEC 2.048 MHz FRCLK[0:7] 10 01 32.768 MHz 2.048 MHz RFCLK / 16 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 50ppm 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz from ICRC 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 130ppm 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz from ICRC 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz from ECRC x x 8.192 MHz FIC unused unused x x 2.048 MHz FIC unused unused x x 8.192 MHz FIC unused unused 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz 01 01 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz FRCLK[0:7] 10 01 32.768 MHz 8.192 MHz 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 50ppm 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ICRC 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 130ppm 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ICRC 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ECRC 00 00 24.704 MHz OEC 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz 01 01 24.704 MHz OEC 1.544 MHz FRCLK[0:7] 10 01 24.704 MHz 1.544 MHz RFCLK / 16 00 01 24.704 MHz +/- 50ppm 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz from ICRC 00 01 24.704 MHz +/- 130ppm 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz from ICRC 00 00 24.704 MHz OEC 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz from ECRC x x unused unused unused x x unused unused unused x x unused unused unused BITS (cbb=0) CLK52 unused unused unused 51.84 MHz +/- 250ppm unused unused unused unused unused 51.84 MHz +/- 250ppm unused unused unused unused unused unused unused unused 51.84 MHz +/- 250ppm unused unused unused unused unused 51.84 MHz +/- 250ppm unused unused unused unused unused PINS CLOCK 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz unused unused unused RXCLK TXCLK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK unused unused unused 8 Application Hints 8.1 Clock Concept 226 FIC = Framer Interface Clock for Rx and Tx; OEC = Optional Emergency Clock; x = Don't care; ECRC = External Clock Recovery Circuit; Clock Recovery none none none SRTS ACM ECRC none none none SRTS ACM ECRC none none none none none none SRTS ACM ECRC none none none SRTS ACM ECRC none none none Mode Framer Interface FAM FAM FAM FAM FAM FAM GIM GIM GIM GIM GIM GIM SYM8 SYM2 EC FAM FAM FAM FAM FAM FAM GIM GIM GIM GIM GIM GIM SYM8 SYM2 EC IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints Clock Concept 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints The PLLs for SRTS accept RFCLK deviations of at least + and - 50 ppm. However, in case of switchover to emergency mode, RFCLK will be used to generate the line clock, which has to fulfill specifications like "maximum 4.6 ppm deviation under ALL circumstances". In this case RFCLK accuracy has to be 4.6 ppm. Data Sheet 227 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints 8.2 Translating AAL Statistics Counters into the ATMF CES Version 2 MIB Reset Statistics Counters and P RAM variables before connection setup atmfCESReassCells Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #2 destructive read accesses atmfCESHdrErrors Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #6 destructive read accesses atmfCESPointerReframes CES Version 2.0 MIB recommends "This records the count of the number of events in which the AAL1 reassembler found that an SDT pointer is not where it is expected, and the pointer must be reacquired." "Pointer is not where it is expected" can mean. a) no pointer occurs within an 8-cell-cycle b) two pointers occur within an 8-cell-cycle c) pointer is not in the 2nd byte of ATM cell payload, Error case a) and b) causes incrementation of Statistics Counter #11. All error cases a), b) and c) causes loss of synchronization of AtmStartOfStructure (IWE8 reassembly buffer read pointer to structure start in ATM cell) with PortStartOfStructure (pointer to structure start in framer interface port), so that Statistics Counter #14 increments. ==> Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #14 destructive read accesses. atmfCESPointerParityErrors Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #10 destructive read accesses atmfCESAal1SeqErrors Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #7 destructive read accesses atmfCESLostCells Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #15 destructive read accesses atmfCESMisinsertedCells Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #8 destructive read accesses Data Sheet 228 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints atmfCESBufUnderflows Can be derived from IWE8 Statistics Counter #13 atmfCESBufOverflows Can be derived from IWE8 Statistics Counter #4 atmfCESCellLossStatus Can be derived from atmfCESBufUnderflows and EndOfUnderflow "When cells are continuously lost for the number of milliseconds specified by atmfCESCellLossIntegrationPeriod, the value is set to loss (2). When cells are no longer lost, the value is set to noLoss (1)." Data Sheet 229 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints 8.3 Jitter Characteristics of the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit This section shows the results of jitter analysis of the ICRC. The device is intended to be used with an external jitter attenuator. For this purpose Infineon's FALC-LH was used. Results are shown with and without jitter attenuator. Measurements were done using a Wandel & Goltermann ANT20 for IWE8 in T1 mode with FALC-LH and Wandel & Goltermann PFJ-8 for the bare IWE8 in E1 or T1 mode. 8.3.1 ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode The jitter tolerance falls with 20 dB per decade, It is independent from the PLL gain ("ASF"). For the bare device the jitter tolerance meets the requirements of ITU-T G.823 and I.431 at medium and low frequencies. At frequencies lower than 1 KHz the jitter tolerance is more than 20 UI. At high frequencies it is lower than the requirements. In combination with an jitter attenuator the requirements are met. Jitter tolerance at high frequencies is better than 0.2 UI. ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 m ode, CDV=0, ASF=4 100,0 -50 ppm 0 ppm Jitter [UI] 10,0 +50 ppm 1,0 ITU G.823 and I.431 0,1 1 Figure 39 Data Sheet 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz] ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator 230 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints E1, ACM, FALC jitter tolerance, CDV=0, ASF=4 100,0 -50 ppm 0 ppm Jitter [UI] 10,0 +50 ppm 1,0 ITU G.823 and I.431 0,1 1 Figure 40 8.3.2 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz] ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode The jitter tolerance of the bare device in T1 mode exceeds the capabilities of the measurement equipment. This behavior is independent from frequency offset or PLL gain. Using the jitter attenuator slightly reduces the jitter tolerance to a level which can be measured. All requirements are fulfilled. Data Sheet 231 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 m ode, CDV=0, ASF=4 100 ITU G.824 and I.431 Jitter [UI] 10 TR-NWT-499 1 Measurement limitation 0,1 1 Figure 41 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz] ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode, CDV=0, ASF=4 100 -130 ppm 0 ppm Jitter [UI] 10 +130 ppm 1 ITU G.824 and I.431 TR-NWT-499 0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz] Figure 42 ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator Data Sheet 232 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints 8.3.3 SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode The aliasing effect which is inherent to the SRTS algorithm causes the jitter tolerance at 681 Hz and all multiples of 681 Hz to be a copy of the jitter tolerance at 0 Hz. The jitter tolerance of the bare device meets the requirements of ITU-T G.823 and I.431 only at medium and low frequencies. At high frequencies it is lower than the requirements. In combination with an jitter attenuator the tolerance at high frequencies is better than 0.2 UI. All requirements are met. SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode 100,0 -50 ppm 0 ppm Jitter [UI] 10,0 +50 ppm 1,0 ITU G.823 and I.431 0,1 1 Figure 43 Data Sheet 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Freqency [Hz] SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator 233 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode 100 -50 ppm 0 ppm Jitter [UI] 10 +50 ppm 1 ITU G.823 and I.431 0,1 1 Figure 44 8.3.4 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz] SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode The aliasing effect which is inherent to the SRTS algorithm causes the jitter tolerance at 513 Hz and all multiples of 513 Hz to be a copy of the jitter tolerance at 0 Hz. Jitter Tolerance at low frequencies violate the requirements. With jitter attenuator jitter tolerance at low frequencies is increased and all jitter frequencies above 20 Hz are removed. As a result no aliasing is possible. The jitter tolerance fulfills the requirements. Data Sheet 234 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode 100 -130 ppm 0 ppm Jiiter [UI] 10 +130 ppm 1 ITU G.824 and I.431 TR-NWT-499 0,1 1 Figure 45 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz] SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode 100 -130 ppm 0 ppm Jitter [UI] 10 +130 ppm ITU G.824 and I.431 1 TR-NWT-499 0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz] Figure 46 SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator Data Sheet 235 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints 8.3.5 ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode The jitter transfer characteristics are much better than the requirements of ITU-T G.735 and I. 432. The -3dB point of the transfer curve is proportional to the PLL-gain: 0.05 Hz for ASF=4, 0.2 Hz for ASF=16. No impact of the jitter attenuator on the already very good jitter transfer behavior could be measured. ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 mode: ASF=4 10,0 -50 ppm Transfer [dB] 0,0 0,01 -10,0 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm -20,0 +50 ppm -30,0 -40,0 ITU G.735 and I.431 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] Figure 47 Data Sheet ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator 236 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode: ASF=4 10,0 -50 ppm Transfer [dB] 0,0 0,01 -10,0 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm -20,0 +50 ppm -30,0 -40,0 ITU G.735 and I.431 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] Figure 48 8.3.6 ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode The jitter transfer characteristics are much better than the requirements of ITU-T G.735 and I. 432. The -3dB point of the transfer curve is proportional to the PLL-gain: 0.075 Hz for ASF=4, 0.3 Hz for ASF=16. The jitter attenuator improves the already very good jitter transfer behavior. At -130 ppm all jitter is removed. Data Sheet 237 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode: ASF=4 10,0 Transfer [dB] 0,0 0,01 -10,0 -130 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm -20,0 -30,0 +130 ppm -40,0 ITU G.735 and I.431 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] Figure 49 ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 m ode: ASF=4 10,0 Transfer [dB] 0,0 0,01 -10,0 0 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000 -20,0 +130 ppm -30,0 -40,0 ITU G.735 and I.431 -50,0 -60,0 Figure 50 Data Sheet Frequency [Hz] ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator 238 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints 8.3.7 SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode The aliasing effect which is inherent to the SRTS algorithm causes the jitter transfer at 681 Hz and all multiples of 681 Hz to be a copy of the jitter transfer at 0 Hz. This violates the requirements. The jitter attenuator removes jitter frequencies above 20 Hz. There is no aliasing and the requirements are met. SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode 10,0 -50 ppm Transfer [dB] 0,0 0,01 -10,0 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm -20,0 -30,0 +50 ppm -40,0 ITU G.735 and I.431 -50,0 -60,0 Figure 51 Data Sheet Frequency [Hz] SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator 239 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints SRTS Jitter Transfer -50 ppm 10,0 Transfer [dB] 0,0 0,01 -10,0 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm -20,0 -30,0 +50 ppm -40,0 -50,0 ITU G.735 and I.431 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] Figure 52 8.3.8 SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode The aliasing effect which is inherent to the SRTS algorithm causes the jitter transfer at 513 Hz and all multiples of 513 Hz to be a copy of the jitter transfer at 0 Hz. This violates the requirements. However, the measurement equipment was not able to measure jitter transfer above 100 Hz and the expected peaking is not measured. The jitter attenuator removes jitter frequencies above 20 Hz. There is no aliasing and the requirements are met. Data Sheet 240 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Application Hints SRTS Jitter Transfer -130 ppm 10,0 Transfer [dB] 0,0 0,01 -10,0 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm -20,0 -30,0 +130 ppm -40,0 -50,0 ITU G.735 and I.431 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] Figure 53 SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode 10,0 Transfer [dB] 0,0 0,01 -10,0 0 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000 -20,0 +130 ppm -30,0 -40,0 ITU G.735 and I.431 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] Figure 54 SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator Data Sheet 241 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9 Electrical Characteristics 9.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 33 Absolute Maximum Ratings Parameter Symbol Limit Values Unit Ambient temperature under bias TA TJ Tstg VCC VI -40 to 85 C 0 to 125 C - 65 to 150 C - 0.5 to 3.6 V - 0.5 to 5.5 V Output voltage level (at any signal pin with respect to ground) VO - 0.5 to 5.51) V ESD robustness2) HBM: 1.5 kW, 100 pF VESD,HB 1000 V Junction temperature under bias Storage temperature Supply voltage Input voltage (at any signal pin with respect to ground) M 1) The maximum high output level is limited to VCC. Due to 5V I/O tolerance output signals might be pulled to 5V level by external pull-up resistors. 2) According to MIL-Std 883D, method 3015.7 and ESD Ass. Standard EOS/ESD-5.1-1993. The RF Pins 20, 21, 26, 29, 32, 33, 34 and 35 are not protected against voltage stress > 300 V (versus VS or GND). The high frequency performance prohibits the use of adequate protective structures. Note: Stresses above those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to "absolute maximum rating" conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability Data Sheet 242 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.2 Operating Range Parameter Ambient temperature Supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input low voltage Input high voltage Data Sheet Symbol TA VCC VI VO VIL VIH Limit Values Unit Remarks Min Max -40 85 C 3.15 3.45 V 3.3V 5% 0 5.5 V 0 5.5 V 5V I/O tolerance 0 0.8 V 2.1 5.5 V 243 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.3 Thermal Package Characteristics Parameter Symbol Limit Values Unit Thermal package resistance junction to ambient without airflow RJA(0,25) 25 C/W TA=25C Data Sheet 244 Test conditions 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.4 DC Characteristics Parameter Symbol VIL VIH Input high voltage VOL Output low voltage1) VOH Output high voltage1) Low-level input leakage ILLI Input low voltage Limit Value Unit Test Condition Min Max 0 0.8 V 2.1 5.5 V 0.4 V 1 A IOL = 4 mA, 8 mA IOH = - 4 mA, - 8 mA VI = VIL(min) = VSS 1 10 A A VI = VIH(VCC) = VCC VI = VIH(max) = 5.5 V 1 A VCC - 0.6 V current High-level input leakage IHLI3.3 IHLI5.5 current High-impedance state output current IOZ Pull up current2) IPUA 1 12 A Pull up current3) IPUB 40 130 A Pull down current4) IPDA 1 12 A Power supply current during power-up ICC 700 mA Average power supply current 5) ICC Typ. Average Power dissipation 5) PTyp. VCC = 3.3V, VI = VIL(min) = VSS VCC = 3.3V, VI = VIL(min) = VSS VCC = 3.3V, VI = VIH(VCC) = VCC VCC = 3.3V, inputs at VSS/VCC, no output loads, FCLOCK = 40 MHz PwrUp 330 1.10 mA VCC = 3.3V, W inputs at VSS/VCC, no output loads, FCLOCK = 25 MHz 1) All Utopia output buffers are 8 mA. 2) The current is applicable for all pins for which an type PUA has been specified in Chapter 2.2 3) The current is applicable for all pins for which an type PUB has been specified in Chapter 2.2 4) The current is applicable for all pins for which an type PDA has been specified in Chapter 2.2 5) Not tested in production. The listed characteristics are ensured over the operating range of the integrated circuit. Typical characteristics specify mean values expected over the production spread. If not otherwise specified, typical characteristics apply at Ta = 25 C and the given supply voltage. Data Sheet 245 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.5 Capacitances Parameter Symbol Limit Value Min Input capacitance Output capacitance Unit Test Condition Max CIN COUT 10 pF 15 pF Note: The listed characteristics are not tested in production. Data Sheet 246 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.6 AC Characteristics TA = -40 to 85 C, VCC = 3.3 V 5%, VSS = 0 V All inputs are driven to VIH = 2.4 V for a logical "1" and to VIL = 0.4 V for a logical "0" All outputs are measured at VH = 2.0 V for a logical "1"and at VL = 0.8 V for a logical "0" The AC testing input/output waveforms are shown below. Test Levels VTH Device under Test VTL CL Timing Test Points Drive Levels VIH VIL Figure 55 9.6.1 IOWFAM Input/Output Waveforms for AC Measurements Clock and Reset Interface 1 CLOCK 2 CLK52 3 RESET Caritd Figure 56 Clock and Reset Interface Timing Diagram Table 34 Clock and Reset Interface AC Timing Characteristics No. 1 Parameter Limit Values Unit Min Typ Max GIM T1: 25,72 40 53,97 ns others: 25,72 40 40,69 ns TCLOCK: Period CLOCK Data Sheet 247 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 34 No. Clock and Reset Interface AC Timing Characteristics (cont'd) Parameter Limit Values Unit Min Typ Max GIM T1: 18,53 25 38,88 MHz others: 24,58 25 38,88 MHz 2 TCLK52: Period CLK522) -50 ppm 19.29 +50 ppm ns 2A FCLK52: Frequency CLK52 2) -50 ppm 51.84 +50 ppm MHz 3 Pulse width RESET low 3xTCLOCK 1A FCLOCK: Frequency CLOCK1) 1) The frequency should be equal or higher than RXCLK and TXCLK of the UTOPIA interface 2) Only required if the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS 9.6.2 Framer Interface 9.6.2.1 Framer Interface in FAM Framer Receive Interface 1 RFCLK 2 FRCLK 3 3 FRFRS 4 5 6 7 FRDAT FRMFB FRITFAM Figure 57 Data Sheet Framer Receive Interface Timing in FAM 248 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 35 No. Framer Receive Interface Timing in FAM Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 TRFCLK: Period RFCLK 1) 30,518 ns 1A FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK 1) 32,768 MHz 2 TFRCLK: Period FRCLK - 130 ppm 122 +130 ppm ns 2A FFRCLK: Frequency FRCLK - 130 ppm 8,192 +130 ppm MHz 3 Delay FRCLK falling to FRFRS 3 32 ns 4 Setup time FRDAT before FRCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 5 Hold time FRDAT after FRCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 6 Setup time FRMFB before FRCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 7 Hold time FRMFB after FRCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 1) In case the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS, the frequency deviation should be +/- 10 ppm Data Sheet 249 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Framer Transmit Interface 1 RFCLK 2 FTCKO 3 3 FTFRS 4 FTDAT 5 5 FTMFS FTITFAM Figure 58 Framer Transmit Interface Timing in FAM Table 36 Framer Transmit Interface Timing in FAM No. Parameter Limit Values Min TRFCLK: Period RFCLK 1) 1 1) Typ Unit Max 30,518 ns 32,768 MHz 1A FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK 2 TFTCKO: Period FTCKO -130 ppm 122 +130 ppm ns 2A FFTCKO: Frequency FTCKO -130 ppm 8,192 +130 ppm MHz 3 Delay FTCKO in falling to FTFRS 3 32 ns Delay FTCKO out falling to FTFRS -3 32 ns Delay FTCKO in falling to FTDAT 3 32 ns Delay FTCKO out falling to FTDAT -3 32 ns Delay FTCKO in falling to FTMFS 3 32 ns Delay FTCKO out falling to FTMFS -3 32 ns 4 5 1) In case the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS, the frequency deviation should be +/- 10 ppm Data Sheet 250 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.6.2.2 Framer Interface in GIM Framer Receive Interface 1 RFCLK 2 FRCLK FRFRS 4 5 6 7 FRDAT FRMFB FritGIM Figure 59 Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM Table 37 Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM No. Parameter Limit Values Min 1 1A 2 2A Typ Unit Max TRFCLK: Period RFCLK 1) E1: 30,518 ns T1: 40,478 ns E1: 32,768 MHz T1: 24,704 MHz E1: 488 ns T1: 647 ns 2,048 MHz FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK 1) TFRCLK: Period FRCLK FFRCLK: Frequency FRCLK E1: Data Sheet 251 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 37 No. Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM (cont'd) Parameter Limit Values Min T1: Typ Unit Max 1,544 MHz 4 Setup time FRDAT before FRCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 5 Hold time FRDAT after FRCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 6 Setup time FRMFB before FRCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 7 Hold time FRMFB after FRCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 1) In case the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS, the frequency deviation should be +/- 10 ppm Framer Transmit Interface 1 RFCLK 2 FTCKO 3 3 FTFRS 4 FTDAT 5 5 FTMFS FtitGIM Figure 60 Data Sheet Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM 252 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 38 No. Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM Parameter Limit Values Min 1A 2A 5 1) E1: 30,518 ns T1: 40,478 ns E1: 32,768 MHz T1: 24,704 MHz E1: 488 ns T1: 647 ns E1: 2,048 MHz T1: 1,544 MHz FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK 1) TFTCKO: Period FTCKO 2 4 Max TRFCLK: Period RFCLK1) 1 3 Typ Unit FFTCKO: Frequency FTCKO Delay FTCKO in falling to FTFRS 3 32 ns Delay FTCKO out falling to FTFRS -3 32 ns Delay FTCKO in falling to FTDAT 3 32 ns Delay FTCKO out falling to FTDAT -3 32 ns Delay FTCKO in falling to FTMFS 3 32 ns Delay FTCKO out falling to FTMFS -3 32 ns In case the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS, the frequency deviation should be +/- 10 ppm Data Sheet 253 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.6.2.3 Framer Interface in SYM Mode Framer Interface in SYM2 1 RFCLK opmo.frri = 1 1 RFCLK opmo.frri = 0 3 4 FRDAT 5 6 FRMFB0 7 FTDAT Fitsym2 Figure 61 Framer Interface Timing for SYM 2.048 MHz Table 39 Framer Interface AC Timing Characteristics in SYM2 Mode No. Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 TRFCLK: Period RFCLK 488 ns 1A FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK 2,048 MHz 3 Setup time FRDAT before RFCLK falling/rising (center of bit period) 15 ns 4 Hold time FRDAT after RFCLK falling/ 15 rising (center of bit period) ns 5 Setup time FRMFBN1) before RFCLK falling/rising 15 ns 6 Hold time FRMFBN1) after RFCLK falling 15 ns 7 Delay RFCLK falling/rising to FTDAT 3 1) 32 ns For usage of FRMFBN in SYM mode see Chapter 7.24 Data Sheet 254 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Framer Interface in SYM8 1 RFCLK 3 4 FRDAT 5 6 FRMFB0 7 FTDAT Fitsym8 Figure 62 Framer Interface Timing in SYM 8.192 MHz Table 40 Framer Interface Timing in SYM8 No. Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 TRFCLK: Period RFCLK 1A FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK -130 ppm 8,192 3 Setup time FRDAT before RFCLK falling/rising (center of bit period) 15 ns 4 Hold time FRDAT after RFCLK falling/ 15 rising (center of bit period) ns 5 Setup time FRMFBN1) before RFCLK 15 falling/rising ns 6 Hold time FRMFBN1) after RFCLK falling 15 ns 7 Delay RFCLK falling to FTDAT 3 1) 122 ns +130ppm MHz 32 ns For usage of FRMFBN in SYM mode see Chapter 7.24 Data Sheet 255 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.6.2.4 Framer Interface in EC Mode I 1 R FC LK 2 2 F R FR S 0 3 TS0.Bit1 FRDAT 4 TS1.Bit8 5 TS0.Bit1 F TD A T TS1.Bit8 even ports 5 TS1.Bit7 F TD A T TS1.Bit6 TS1.Bit5 o dd p orts Fitec Figure 63 Framer Interface Timing in EC Mode Table 41 Framer Interface Timing in EC Mode No. Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 TRFCLK: Period RFCLK 1A FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK -130 ppm 8,192 +130ppm MHz 2 Delay RFCLK rising to FTFRS0 3 32 3 Setup time FRDAT before RFCLK falling (center of bit period) 15 ns 4 Hold time FRDAT after RFCLK falling 15 (center of bit period) ns 5 Delay RFCLK falling to FTDAT 9.6.3 122 3 ns 32 ns ns UTOPIA Interface The AC characteristics of the UTOPIA interface fulfills the ATM Forum "UTOPIA level 2 Specification, Version 1.0" as defined for the interface running at 33 MHz. The AC characteristics are based on the timing specification for the receiver side of a signal. Data Sheet 256 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics The setup and the hold times are defined with regard to a positive clock edge, see Figure 64. Taking the actual used clock frequency into account (e.g. up to the max. frequency), the corresponding (min. and max.) transmit side "clock to output" propagation delay specifications can be derived. The timing references (tT5 to tT12) are according toTable 42 to Table 45. In the following tables, A>P (column DIR, Direction) defines a signal from the ATM layer (transmitter, driver) to the PHY layer (receiver), A<P defines a signal from the PHY layer (transmitter, driver) to the ATM layer (receiver). Clock Signal tT5, tT7 tT6, tT8 input setup to clock input hold from clock Figure 64 UTOPIA1 Setup and hold time definition (single- and multi PHY) Clock tT9 tT10 Signal tT11 signal going low impedance from clock tT12 signal going low impedance to clock signal going high signal going high impedance from clock impedance to clock UTOPIA2 Figure 65 Data Sheet Tri-state timing (multi-PHY, multiple devices only) 257 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 42 Transmit Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Single PHY) No. Signal Name DIR t1 TXCLK1) Description Limit Values A>P TXCLK frequency (nominal) Unit Min Max 0 33 MHz tT2 TXCLK duty cycle 40 60 % tT3 TXCLK peak-to-peak jitter - 5 % tT4 TXCLK rise/fall time - 3 ns 8 - ns 1 - ns 8 - ns 1 - ns tT5 A>P Input setup to TXCLK tT6 TXDAT[7:0], TXPTY, TXSOC, TXENB tT7 TXCLAV A<P Input setup to TXCLK Input hold from TXCLK tT8 1) Input hold from TXCLK The frequency should be equal or smaller than the coreclock CLOCK Table 43 No. Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Single PHY) Signal Name DIR RXCLK1) t1 Description Limit Values A>P RXCLK frequency (nominal) Unit Min Max 0 33 MHz tT2 RXCLK duty cycle 40 60 % tT3 RXCLK peak-to-peak jitter - 5 % tT4 RXCLK rise/fall time - 3 ns 8 - ns tT5 RXENB A>P Input setup to RXCLK tT6 Input hold from RXCLK 1 - ns tT7 RXDAT[7:0], A<P Input setup to RXCLK RXPTY, Input hold from RXCLK RXSOC, RXCLAV 8 - ns 1 - ns tT8 1) The frequency should be equal or smaller than the coreclock CLOCK Data Sheet 258 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 44 Transmit Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Multi-PHY) No. Signal Name DIR t1 TXCLK1) Description Limit Values A>P TXCLK frequency (nominal) Unit Min Max 0 33 MHz tT2 TXCLK duty cycle 40 60 % tT3 TXCLK peak-to-peak jitter - 5 % tT4 TXCLK rise/fall time - 3 ns 8 - ns 1 - ns 8 - ns tT5 tT6 tT7 TXDAT[7:0], TXPTY, TXSOC, TXENB, TXADR[4:0] A>P Input setup to TXCLK TXCLAV A<P Input setup to TXCLK Input hold from TXCLK tT8 Input hold from TXCLK 1 - ns tT9 Signal going low impedance to TXCLK 8 - ns tT10 Signal going high impedance to TXCLK 0 - ns tT11 Signal going low impedance from TXCLK 1 - ns tT12 Signal going high impedance from TXCLK 1 - ns 1) The frequency should be equal or smaller than the coreclock CLOCK Table 45 No. t1 Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Multi-PHY) Signal Name DIR RXCLK1) Description Limit Values A>P RXCLK frequency (nominal) Unit Min Max 0 33 MHz tT2 RXCLK duty cycle 40 60 % tT3 RXCLK peak-to-peak jitter - 5 % tT4 RXCLK rise/fall time - 3 ns 8 - ns 1 - ns tT5 tT6 RXENB, RXADR[4:0] Data Sheet A>P Input setup to RXCLK Input hold from RXCLK 259 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 45 No. tT7 tT8 tT9 Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz, Multi-PHY) (cont'd) Signal Name DIR Description Limit Values RXDAT[7:0], A<P Input setup to RXCLK RXPTY, Input hold from RXCLK RXSOC, Signal going low impedance RXCLAV to RXCLK Unit Min Max 8 - ns 1 - ns 8 - ns tT10 Signal going high impedance to RXCLK 0 - ns tT11 Signal going low impedance from RXCLK 1 - ns tT12 Signal going high impedance from RXCLK 1 - ns 1) The frequency should be equal or smaller than the coreclock CLOCK 9.6.4 IMA Interface At the IMA interface the IWE8 operates in cycles of 12 system clocks. ATBTC can become active during cycle #3, the UNCHEC can become active during cycle #9. The Port number is always active for 6 cycles. C LO C K 1 A TB T C 2 UNCHEC 3 P N 0..2 Totii Figure 66 Data Sheet Timing of the IMA Interface 260 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 46 No. IMA Interface AC Timing Characteristics Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 Delay master clock to ATBTC 26 ns 2 Delay master clock to UNCHEC 26 ns 3 Delay master clock to PN[0:2] 26 ns 9.6.5 Clock Recovery Interface CLOCK 6 SCLK 1 1 SSP 2 SDI B it1 B it0 3 B it3 1 B it3 0 4 SDOD B it1 B it0 B it3 1 B it3 0 5 SDOR B it1 B it0 B it3 1 B it3 0 Critd Figure 67 Clock Recovery Interface Timing Diagram Table 47 Clock Recovery Interface AC Timing Characteristics No. Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 Delay SCLK rising to SSP -1 2 Setup time SDI before SCLK rising 20 ns 3 Hold time SDI after SCLK rising 0 ns 4 Delay SCLK rising to SDOD 0 11 ns 5 Delay SCLK rising to SDOR 0 11 ns 6 Delay CLOCK to SCLK 1 16 ns Data Sheet 261 11 ns 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.6.6 Microprocessor Interface 9.6.6.1 Intel Mode M PADR 1 9 M PCS 2 8 M PW R 10 3 5 6 11 M PRDY 4 7 M PDAT mwctg Figure 68 Intel Mode Write Cycle Timing Diagram Table 48 Intel Mode Write Cycle AC Characteristics No. Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 Setup time MPADR before MPCS low 0 ns 2 Setup time MPCS before MPWR low 0 ns 3 Delay MPRDY low after MPWR low 2 4 MPDAT valid after MPWR low 5 Pulse width MPRDY low 2 x Tclock 6 MPRDY high to MPWR high 10 ns 7 Hold time MPDAT after MPWR high 5 ns 8 Hold time MPCS after MPWR high 5 ns 9 Hold time MPADR after MPWR high 5 ns 10 Delay MPCS low to MPRDY high 2 20 ns 11 Delay MPCS high to MPRDY high impedance 2 20 ns Data Sheet 20 ns 2 x Tclock ns 262 23xTclock ns 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics M PADR 1 9 M PCS 2 8 M PRD 12 3 4 6 13 M PRDY 10 11 7 5 M PDAT mrctg Figure 69 Intel Mode Read Cycle Timing Diagram Table 49 Intel Mode Read Cycle AC Timing Characteristics No. Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 Setup time MPADR before MPCS low 0 ns 2 Setup time MPCS before MPRD low 0 ns 3 Delay MPRDY low after MPRD low 2 20 4 Pulse width MPRDY low 2 x Tclock 23xTclock ns 5 MPDAT valid before MPRDY high 10 ns 6 MPRDY high to MPRD high 10 ns 7 Delay time MPDAT after MPRD high 3 ns 8 Hold time MPCS after MPRD high 5 ns 9 Hold time MPADR after MPRD high 5 ns 10 Delay MPRD low to MPDAT low impedance 4 20 ns 11 Delay MPRD high to MPDAT high impedance 5 20 ns 12 Delay MPCS low to MPRDY high 2 20 ns 13 Delay MPCS high to MPRDY high impedance 2 20 ns Data Sheet 263 ns 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.6.6.2 Motorola Mode MPADR 1 2 MPCS 3 4 MPRW 5 6 MPTS 7 8 10 11 9 MPTA 12 14 15 13 MPDAT (READ) 16 17 MPDAT (WRITE) Interface Motorola Figure 70 Motorola Mode Timing Diagram Table 50 Motorola Mode AC Timing Characteristics No. Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 Setup time MPADR before MPCS low 0 ns 2 Hold time MPADR after MPTS high 5 ns 3 Setup time MPCS before MPTS low 0 ns 4 Hold time MPCS after MPTS high 5 ns 5 Setup time MPRW before MPTS low 10 ns 6 Hold time MPRW after MPTS high 0 ns 7 Delay MPCS low to MPTA high 5 15 8 Delay MPTA low after MPTS low 2 x Tclock 23x Tclock ns 9 Pulse width MPTA low Tclock Tclock 10 MPTA low to MPTS high 0 Data Sheet 264 ns ns ns 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 50 No. Motorola Mode AC Timing Characteristics (cont'd) Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 11 Delay MPCS high to MPTA high impedance 5 15 ns 12 Delay MPTS low to MPDAT low impedance 1 15 ns 13 MPDAT valid before MPTA high 5 ns 14 Delay time MPDAT after MPTS high 2 ns 15 Delay MPTS high to MPDAT high impedance 2 16 MPDAT valid after MPTS low 17 Hold time MPDAT after MPTS high 9.6.7 17 ns 2 x Tclock ns 5 ns RAM Interface CLOCK 8 Basic 12 RMCLK cycle 9 RMCLK 1 RMADR AR1 AR2 AR3 AR4 AR5 AR6 AW1 AW2 AW3 AW4 AW5 AR1 2 RMADC 2 2 RMOE 3 4 RMDAT R 1 5 R 2 R 3 R 4 R 5 R 6 6 W1 W2 7 W3 2 2 2 2 W4 W5 RMWR RMCS ritd Figure 71 Data Sheet RAM Interface Timing Diagram 265 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics Table 51 No. RAM Interface AC Timing Characteristics Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 Delay RMCLK rising to RMADR 1 11 ns 2 Delay RMCLK rising to RMADC 1 7 ns Delay RMCLK rising to RMOE 1 7 ns Delay RMCLK rising to RMWR 1 7 ns Delay RMCLK rising to RMCS 1 7 ns 3 Setup time RMDAT before RMCLK rising (all read cycles) 11 ns 4 Hold time RMDAT after RMCLK rising (all read cycles) 0 ns 5 Delay RMCLK falling to RMDAT low impedance (write cycle W1) 0 8 ns 6 Delay RMCLK rising to RMDAT (write cycles W2 to W5) 6 12 ns 7 Delay RMCLK falling to RMDAT high impedance (write cycle W5) 0 8 ns 8 Delay CLOCK to RMCLK 6 12 ns 9 TRMCLK: Period RMCLK TCLOCK ns 9A FRMCLK: Frequency RMCLK FCLOCK MHz Data Sheet 266 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Electrical Characteristics 9.6.8 Boundary-Scan Test Interface 1 TCK 2 3 TDI 4 5 TDO 6 TRST Btitd Figure 72 Boundary-Scan Test Interface Timing Diagram Table 52 Boundary-Scan Test Interface AC Timing Characteristics No. Parameter Limit Values Min Typ Unit Max 1 TTCK: Period TCK 1A FTCK: Frequency TCK 2 Setup time TMS, TDI before TCK rising 10 ns 3 Hold time TMS, TDI after TCK rising 10 ns 4 Delay TCK falling to TDO valid 0 30 ns 5 Delay TCK falling to TDO high impedance 0 30 ns 6 Pulse width TRST low 2 x TTCK Data Sheet 160 ns 6,25 267 MHz ns 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Testmode 10 Testmode 10.1 Device Identification Register 31 28 27 12 11 1 Version(3:0) Partnumber(15:0) Manufacturer-ID(10:0) 0100B 0000000001000110B 00001000001B 10.2 0 1 Instruction Register The following table shows the instruction binary codes for the 4 bit instruction register. Code Boundary-Scan Instruction Register Binary Codes 0000 = EXTEST 0001 = IDCODE 0101 = SAMPLE 0101 = INTEST 0111 = CLAMP 1111 = BYPASS 10.3 Boundary-Scan Register Table 53 describes the Boundary-Scan register. The register contains 299 cells. The cells of type "control" will disable the corresponding outputs when set. The control cells are preset to a safe logic-1 during the TEST-LOGIC-RESET state of the TAP controller. Table 53 Boundary Scan Register Name Name Name ftcko_4_o rxdat_2_o ftcko_0_o ftcko_4_i rxdat_3_o ftcko_0_i ftcko_4_c rxdat_4_o ftcko_0_c ftcko_5_o rxdat_5_o frfrsn_0_o ftcko_5_i rxdat_6_o frfrsn_0_c ftcko_5_c rxdat_7_o ftdat_0_o 1) rtsen_n rxprt_o mpcs_n rxprt_c1) Data Sheet 268 ftdat_0_c ftmfs_0_o 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Testmode Table 53 Boundary Scan Register (cont'd) Name Name Name mpwr_n rxenb_o ftmfs_0_c mprd_n rxenb_i ftfrsn_0_o mpdat_0_o rxenb_c ftfrsn_0_c mpdat_0_i rxclk frlos_1 mpdat_c rmclk frclk_1 mpdat_1_o pmt frdat_1 mpdat_1_i rmdat_0_o frmfb_1 mpdat_2_o rmdat_0_i ftcko_1_o mpdat_2_i rmdat_c ftcko_1_i mpdat_3_o rmdat_1_o ftcko_1_c mpdat_3_i rmdat_1_i frfrsn_1_o mpdat_4_o rmdat_2_o frfrsn_1_c mpdat_4_i rmdat_2_i ftdat_1_o mpdat_5_o rmdat_3_o ftdat_1_c mpdat_5_i rmdat_3_i ftmfs_1_o mpdat_6_o rmdat_4_o ftmfs_1_c mpdat_6_i rmdat_4_i ftfrsn_1_o mpdat_7_o rmdat_5_o ftfrsn_1_c mpdat_7_i rmdat_5_i frlos_2 mpdat_8_o rmdat_6_o frclk_2 mpdat_8_i rmdat_6_i frdat_2 mpdat_9_o rmdat_7_o frmfb_2 mpdat_9_i rmdat_7_i ftcko_2_o mpdat_10_o rmdat_8_o ftcko_2_i mpdat_10_i rmdat_8_i ftcko_2_c mpdat_11_o sdi frfrsn_2_o mpdat_11_i rmdat_9_o frfrsn_2_c mpdat_12_o rmdat_9_i ftdat_2_o mpdat_12_i rmdat_10_o ftdat_2_c mpdat_13_o rmdat_10_i ftmfs_2_o Data Sheet 269 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Testmode Table 53 Boundary Scan Register (cont'd) Name Name Name mpdat_13_i rmdat_11_o ftmfs_2_c mpdat_14_o rmdat_11_i ftfrsn_2_o mpdat_14_i rmdat_12_o ftfrsn_2_c mpdat_15_o rmdat_12_i frlos_3 mpdat_15_i tbus frclk_3 rfclk rmdat_13_o frdat_3 clock rmdat_13_i frmfb_3 reset_n sdod ftcko_3_o mprdy_o sdor ftcko_3_i mprdy_c rmdat_14_o ftcko_3_c pn_0 rmdat_14_i frfrsn_3_o mpir1_n rmdat_15_o frfrsn_3_c mpir2_n rmdat_15_i ftdat_3_o mpadr_0 rmdat_16_o ftdat_3_c mpadr_1 rmdat_16_i ftmfs_3_o mpadr_2 ssp ftmfs_3_c mpadr_3 rmdat_17_o ftfrsn_3_o mpadr_4 rmdat_17_i ftfrsn_3_c mpadr_5 rmdat_18_o frlos_4 mpadr_6 rmdat_18_i frclk_4 mpadr_7 rmdat_19_o frdat_4 mpadr_8 rmdat_19_i frmfb_4 mpadr_9 rmdat_20_o tscsh mpadr_10 rmdat_20_i frfrsn_4_o mpadr_11 sclk frfrsn_4_c mpadr_12 rmdat_21_o ftdat_4_o mpadr_13 rmdat_21_i ftdat_4_c mpadr_14 rmdat_22_o ftmfs_4_o mpadr_15 rmdat_22_i ftmfs_4_c mpadr_16 rmdat_23_o ftfrsn_4_o Data Sheet 270 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Testmode Table 53 Boundary Scan Register (cont'd) Name Name Name mpadr_17 rmdat_23_i ftfrsn_4_c licec rmdat_24_o frlos_5 clk52 rmdat_24_i frclk_5 e1t1 rmdat_25_o frdat_5 tscen rmdat_25_i frmfb_5 txadr_0 rmdat_26_o frfrsn_5_o txadr_1 rmdat_26_i frfrsn_5_c txadr_2 rmdat_27_o ftdat_5_o txadr_3 rmdat_27_i ftdat_5_c txadr_4 rmdat_28_o ftmfs_5_o rxadr_0 rmdat_28_i ftmfs_5_c rxadr_1 rmdat_29_o ftfrsn_5_o rxadr_2 rmdat_29_i ftfrsn_5_c rxadr_3 rmdat_30_o frlos_6 rxadr_4 rmdat_30_i frclk_6 pn_1 rmdat_31_o frdat_6 pn_2 rmdat_31_i frmfb_6 txcla_i2) rmdat_32_o frfrsn_6_o txcla_o2) rmdat_32_i frfrsn_6_c txcla_c2) rmwr_n ftdat_6_o txenb_o rmcs_n ftdat_6_c txenb_i rmoe_n ftmfs_6_o txenb_c rmadc_n ftmfs_6_c txsoc unchec_4 ftfrsn_6_o txdat_0 rmadr_0 ftfrsn_6_c txdat_1 rmadr_1 frlos_7 txdat_2 rmadr_2 frclk_7 txdat_3 rmadr_3 frdat_7 txdat_4 rmadr_4 frmfb_7 txdat_5 rmadr_5 ftcko_6_o Data Sheet 271 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Testmode Table 53 Boundary Scan Register (cont'd) Name Name Name txdat_6 rmadr_6 ftcko_6_i txdat_7 rmadr_7 ftcko_6_c txprt3) rmadr_8 ftcko_7_o uttr_n rmadr_9 ftcko_7_i txclk rmadr_10 ftcko_7_c rxsoc_o rmadr_11 frfrsn_7_o rxsoc_c rmadr_12 frfrsn_7_c rxcla_o4) rmadr_13 ftdat_7_o rxcla_i4) rmadr_14 ftdat_7_c rxcla_c4) rmadr_15 ftmfs_7_o atbtc_3 frlos_0 ftmfs_7_c rxdat_0_o frclk_0 ftfrsn_7_o rxdat_c frdat_0 ftfrsn_7_c rxdat_1_o frmfb_0 1) corresponds to pin RXPTY 2) corresponds to pin TXCLAV 3) corresponds to pin TXPTY 4) corresponds to pin RXCLAV Data Sheet 272 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Package Outlines 11 Package Outlines pa09116 Sorts of Packing Package outlines for tubes, trays etc. are contained in our Data Book "Package Information". SMD = Surface Mounted Device Figure 73 Data Sheet Dimensions in mm Package Outline: P-BGA-256 (Plastic Metric Quad Flat Package) 273 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix 12 Appendix 12.1 ATM Adaptation Layer 1 The ATM Adaptation Layer 1 (AAL1) consists of two sublayers: The Segmentation and Reassembly Sublayer (SAR), which is responsible for sequence integrity of the transmitted ATM cell stream and the Convergency Sublayer, responsible for blocking of user data into 47-octet SAR boundaries. Figure 74 gives an overview on the AAL1 frame-structure as defined in ITU-T I.363.1 [31]. Parity Pointer 1 bit AAL user info 7 bit P format Dummy Fill N octets P User information 1 octet 46 octets CS-Sublayer User information Non-P format 47 octets CSI SC CRC Py 1 bit 3 bit 3 bit 1 bit SAR-Sublayer SN SNP 1 octet Pointer CSI SC CRC Py SN SNP SAR SDU PDU SAR-SDU 47 octets ATM Header ATM-SDU = SAR-PDU 5 octets 48 octets ATM Layer = octet offset of data block over 2 cells (111 1111 if not required) = Convergency Sublayer Indication Non-P Format: CSI = 0 P format: CSI = 1 if SC = 0,2,4 or 6, P-field may be inserted CSI = 0 if SC = 1,3,5 or 7, P-field is unused (Non-P format used) = Sequence Count = Cyclic Redundancy Check = Even Parity bit = Sequence Number incremented by 1 modulo 8 for each SAR-SDU = Sequence Number Protection = Segmentation & Reassembly = Service Data Unit = Protocol Data Unit Aal1 Figure 74 Data Sheet Structure of the AAL1 SAR-PDU 274 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix Robust Sequence Count Algorithm This algorithm is completely described in annex D of the ETSI B-ISDN AAL type 1 Specification [17] and ITU-T I.363.1 [31] and is shown in Figure Figure 75. The algorithm is described by a state machine of 5 states. A change in states within the state machine is indicated by an arrow, on which there are two distinct values represented. The first value refers to the event that originates the state change, and the second value refers to the action to be taken as a result of that event. A decision in this algorithm is taken after evaluation of 2 consecutive SN. This means that when a cell is received it must be temporarily stored, waiting for the next cell before it is finally passed to the reassembly buffer. In the state machine, an action to be taken (accept or discard) always refers to the stored cell. The sequence counting of modulo 8 permits that the algorithm detects a maximum of to 6 consecutive lost cells and 1 misinserted cell, assuming that misinsertion of one cell is at least as probable as the loss of 7 consecutive cells. Lost cells are compensated by inserting an appropriate number of dummy cells into the transmitted data of the channel. This is required to maintain bit count integrity. The number of octets inserted per dummy cell is equal to the number of user information octets in the SAR-PDU payload of each cell. When one misinserted cell is detected, the algorithm is able to delete the misinserted cell, because of the delay of one cell in taking a decision. Data Sheet 275 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix invalid SN/discard Start Initialization out of seq/discard valid SN/discard invalid SN/discard Out of Sync invalid SN/discard in seq/accept out of seq/discard in seq - 1/discard in seq - 1+1/accept invalid SN/accept Out of Seq in seq - 1/discard Sync out of seq/accept out of seq/discard in seq/insert dummy cell(s) + accept in seq/accept in seq - 1+1/accept invalid SN/discard Invalid T1306830-95 Figure 75 Data Sheet Informative and Example Algorithm State Machine (Fig. III.2/I.363.1) 276 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix Fast Sequence Count Algorithm The state machines of the robust SC algorithm and the fast SC algorithm are the same. The only difference is that in the fast algorithm, the action to be taken always refers to the currently received cell, while in the standard algorithm it refers to the temporarily stored cell. Therefore the fast SC algorithm does not introduce additional one-cell delay. In the fast SC algorithm, a misinserted cell is immediately accepted in the reassembly buffer. Only at the arrival of the next cell, it is detected that the previous cell was misinserted. Because the misinserted cell was already accepted, the current (in sequence) cell will be discarded instead. Lost cells are compensated with the insertion of dummy cells as in the standard algorithm. Frequency and Value of the Pointer Field The pointer field contains the binary value of the offset, measured in octets, between the end of the pointer field and the start of the structured block, in the 93 octet payload. The payload consists of the remaining 46 octets of this SAR-PDU payload and the 47 octets of the next SAR-PDU payload. The frequency of occurrence of the pointer field is according to ITU-T I.363.1 [31]. The pointer field is used exactly once in every cycle, where a cycle is the sequence of eight consecutive SAR-PDUs with Sequence Count values 0, 1, to 7. The pointer field is used at the first available opportunity in a cycle to point to a start of a structured block. If a start of a structured block is not present in a cycle, then a pointer field containing a dummy offset value `127' is used at the last opportunity in the cycle. Data Sheet 277 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix 12.2 Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS This sub chapter contains a short description of the SRTS method, as defined in [12] and [31]. The SRTS algorithm is used to measure the frequency deviation of a data stream which is packetized in ATM cells. This frequency is coded in 4 bits and sent to the receiver. At the receiver, the correct frequency is regenerated. The 4 RTS bits are spread over 8 ATM cells. These 8 ATM cells contain 8 x 47 byte x 8 bit/byte = 3008 bits of data. In case of an E1 line, the data arrives with 2.048 Mbit/s, thus after 3008 bit / 2.048 Mbit/s = 1,46875 ms a complete RTS value is received. The frequency of generated RTS values is 681 Hz. The RTS value is calculated in the following way: In N = 3008 cycles of Fdata, we have Mq cycles of the reduced network clock. The reduced network clock Fnx has to fulfil the following equation: 1 <= Fnx / Fdata < 2. This defines the value of x in the equation: Fnx = 8 kHz X 19440 / 2^x. For a full E1 line Fdata = 2.048 MHz, x = 6 and Fnx = 2.43 MHz. The maximum input frequency deviation of 200 ppm (E1 lines: less than 50 ppm) of the data clock translates in a deviation from Mq. At the receiving side, the same network clock is available and the numbers N and x are known. As a result, the nominal value Mnom of Mq is known, and only the deviation from Mnom has to be transmitted. The number of bits to transmit the deviation (p = 4) has to be sufficient for the maximum frequency deviation. tolerance N cycles T seconds fs t Mq Mmin Mnom Mmax fnx t y y 2p T1817630-92 Figure 76 Data Sheet The Concept of SRTS (Fig. 5/I.363.1) 278 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix RTS values are generated as follows: T fs Counter A divided by N fn 1 -- x Latch fnx RTS P-bit counter Ct T1817640-92 Figure 77 Generation of Residual Time Stamp (RTS) (Fig.6/ I.363.1) The transformation of RTS values in a clock is not specified in the SRTS specifications. Basically (the implementation is slightly different), the ICRC calculates another RTS value based on the transmit clock. The difference between received RTS values and locally calculated RTS values, drives a DCO. This solution can be described as a PLL with an unusual phase comparator. Data Sheet 279 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix 12.3 Adaptive Clock Method ACM The adaptive clock method does not require information concerning the source clock transferred over the ATM network. The speed of the transmitter is adjusted to the filling level of the receive buffer. If the transmit clock is too slow, the buffer filling level will increase causing the clock recovery circuit to slow down the transmit clock. If the transmit clock is too fast the buffer filling level will decrease. In this case the clock recovery circuit will increase the transmit clock. Data Sheet 280 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix 12.4 Channel Associated Signalling ITU-T recommendation G.704 [24] defines Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) for interfaces at 2048 kbit/s (E1) and 1544 kbit/s (DS1) interfaces carrying 64 kbit/s channels. The mapping of E1 or DS1 multiframes containing CAS into ATM cells is defined in the ATM-Forum "Circuit Emulation Services Specification" [10]. In case of E1 and DS1 circuit emulation, the user information carried via AAL1 consists of a stream of payload substructures followed by an optional signalling substructure. Each payload and signalling substructure corresponds to one E1 multiframe / DS1 extended superframe. The payload substructure contains the channel slots and the optional signalling substructure contains the signalling bits associated with the channels. The following section gives an overview on this topic. 12.4.1 E1 An E1 multiframe comprises 16 consecutive frames. These are numbered from 0 to15. The multiframe alignement signal is 0000 and occupies digit time slots 1 to 4 of 64 kbit/ s channel time slot 16 in frame 0. When 64 kbit/s channel time slot 16 is used for channel-associated signalling, the 64 kbit/s capacity is sub-multiplexed into lower-rate signalling channels using the multiframe alignement signal as a reference. Details of the bit allocation are given in Table 54 Table 54 Bit allocation of E1 time slot 16 for CAS E1 Multiframe Bit allocation of time slot 16 Frame 0 (CasBeginFrame) 0000 xyxx Frame 1 abcd channel 1 abcd channel 16 Frame 2 abcd channel 2 abcd channel 17 ... ... ... Frame 15 abcd channel 15 abcd channel 30 x = spare bit, to be set to 1 if not used y = Bit used for alarm indication to the remote end. In undisturbed operation, set to 0; in alarm condition, set to 1. Data Sheet 281 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix . A TM S D U of 1st ce ll A A L1 h ead er oc tet A A L s tru ctu re po inte r = 0 tim es lot x tim es lot y tim es lot z tim es lot x tim es lot y tim es lot z tim es lot tim es lot tim es lot tim es lot ATM SDU o f 2 nd ce ll 1 st fra m e 2 nd fra m e x y z x 1 5th fram e A A L1 h ead er oc tet tim es lot y tim es lot z A B C D tim e slot x A B C D tim es lot y A B C D tim e slot z u nus ed =0 00 0 tim es lot x tim es lot y tim es lot z tim es lot tim es lot tim es lot tim es lot x y z x 1st m ultifram e 1 6th fram e s igna lling s ubs tru ctu re 1 st fra m e 2n d m ultifram e 1 4th fram e Example Multiframe Structure for 3x64 kbps E1 with CA Figure 78 12.4.2 Example Multiframe Structure for 3x64 kbit/s E1 with CAS DS1 A DS1 (T1) multiframe consists of 24 frames. They are numbered from 1 to 24. In the multiframe there are four different signalling bits (A, B, C and D) providing four independent 333 bit/s channels, two independent 667 bit/s channels or one 1333 bit/s channel. The four signalling bits for each time slot are transported in the last bit of each time slot of the frames 6, 12, 18, 24. In these frames only 7 bits are available for data transmission (Robbed Bit Signalling). When mapping DS1 Nx64 kbit/s frames into ATM Data Sheet 282 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Appendix cells the CAS bits may also be transmitted in the payload section. However, only the signalling bits of the CAS substructure are relevant. Table 55 Allocation of CAS Bits to 24 Frame Multiframe DS1 Multiframe Digit time slot in each channel used for Signalling channel identifier Characters Signalling 333 bit/s 667 bit/s 1333 bit/s Frame 1 (CasBeginFrame) - Frame 5 1-8 - - - - Frame 6 1-7 8 A A A Frame 7 - Frame 11 1-8 - - - - Frame 12 1-7 8 B B A Frame 13 - Frame 17 1-8 - - - - Frame 18 1-7 8 C A A Frame 19 - Frame 23 1-8 - - - - Frame 24 1-7 8 D B A A A L1 h ead er oc tet A A L s tru ctu re po inte r = 0 tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x 1 st fra m e 2nd fram e 3 rd fra m e tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x A TM S D U A B C D ts x u nus ed =0 00 0 tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x 1st m ultifram e 22 th fra m e 23 th fra m e 24 th fra m e sig na lling 1 st fra m e 2nd fram e 3 rd fra m e 2n d m ultifram e 19 th fra m e 20 th fra m e 2 1st fra m e Example Multiframe Structure for 1x64 kbps DS1 with C Figure 79 Data Sheet Example Multiframe Structure for 1x64 kbit/s DS1 with CAS 283 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Contacts for SRTS Patent Fee 13 Contacts for SRTS Patent Fee When using the PXB 4220 a patent fee for the SRTS clock recovery needs to be paid to Telcordia Technologies, Inc.: Telcordia Technologies, Inc. 331 Newman Springs Road NVC-3Z375 Red Bank, NJ 07701-5699 Web: Data Sheet http://www.telcordia.com 284 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Glossary 14 Glossary AAL ATM Adaptation Layer ACM Adaptive Clock Method ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode B-ISDN Broadband - Integrated Services Digital Network CBR Constant Bit Rate CDV Cell Delay Variation CES Circuit Emulation Service CLP Cell Loss Priority CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check CS Convergence Sublayer CSI Convergence Sublayer Indication DCO Digitally Controlled Oscillator DS1 Digital Signal 1 (1.544 Mbit/s) (=T1) EC Echo Canceller FALC Framer And Line Interface Component FAM FALC Mode FIFO First In, First Out Buffer FS/DL Frame Sync/Data Link FSM Finite State Machine GFC Generic Flow Control GIM Generic Interface Mode HEC Header Error Control I/O Input/Output ICRC Internal Clock Recovery Circuit ITU International Telecommunications Union ITU-T International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications Standardization Sector IWE8 Interworking Element component for 8 channels PXB 4220 IWECORE IWE8 without ICRC LCD Loss of Cell Delineation LIC Line Interface Card or Line Interface Circuit Data Sheet 285 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Glossary LOS Loss of Signal LSB Least Significant Bit MSB Most Significant Bit NIC Network Interface Controller or Card NNI Network-to-Network Interface OAM Operation, Administration, and Maintenance OCD Out of Cell Delineation PDU Protocol Data Unit PHY Physical Layer Device PTI Payload Type Identifier RTS Residual Time Stamp SAR Segmentation And Reassembly SARE Segmentation And Reassembly Element, PXB 4110 SC Sequence Count SDT Structured Data Transfer SN Sequence Number SNP Sequence Number Protection SRTS Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SSRAM Synchronous Static RAM SYM Synchronous Mode TAP Test Access Port TBD To Be Defined UDT Unstructured Data Transfer UNI User-to-Network Interface UTOPIA Universal Test and Operations Physical Interface for ATM UTOPIA Receive Interface (Upstream) Data is transferred from the PHY Layer (in this case the IWE8) to the ATM Layer. UTOPIA Transmit Interface (Downstream) Data is transferred from the ATM Layer to the PHY Layer (in this case the IWE8). VC Virtual Channel Data Sheet 286 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Glossary VCI Virtual Channel Identifier VP Virtual Path VPI Virtual Path Identifier Data Sheet 287 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Bibliography 15 Bibliography 1. ANSI, American National Standard for Telecommunications. Digital Hierarchy Formats Specification, T1.107-1995. 2. ANSI, B-ISDN Customer Installation Interfaces: Physical Layer Specification, Draft American National Standard for Telecommunications, T1E1.2/93 020R2. 3. ANSI, B-ISDN Network Node Interfaces and Inter-Network Interfaces: Rates and Formats Specification, Draft American National Standard for Telecommunications T1S1.5/94 001R1. 4. ATM Forum, DS1 Physical Layer Specification, Version 1.0, af-phy-0016, September 1994 5. ATM Forum: UTOPIA Specification Level 1, Version 2.01, af-phy-0017.000, March 1994 6. ATM Forum: UTOPIA Level 2 Specification, Version 1.0, ATM Forum Contribution afphy-0039.000, June 1995. 7. ATM Forum, "E1 Physical Interface Specification", af-phy-0064.000, September, 1996 8. ATM Forum, Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA Specification, Version 1.1, af-phy0086.001, February, 1999 9. ATM Forum, "ATM on Fractional E1/T1", str-phy-fn64-01.00, July, 1999 10.ATM Forum, Circuit Emulation Service Interoperability Specification Version 2.0, afvtoa-0078.000, January, 1997. 11.ATM Forum, "User-Network Interface Specification", Version 3.1, 1994 12.Bellcore, Generic requirement, ATM and AAL protocols, GR-1113-CORE, Issue 1, July 1994 13.Bellcore, Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) Protocols Generic Requirements, GR-1113-CORE, Issue 1, July 1994. 14.Bellcore, "Digital Cross-Connect System - Generic Requirements and Objectives", TR-NWT-000170, Issue 2, January, 1993 15.Bellcore, B-ISDN UNI and NNI Physical Layer Generic Criteria, TR-NWT-001112, Issue 1, June 1993 16.Bellcore, Transport Systems Generic Requirements, TR-TSV-000499, Issue 4, December 1991 17.ETSI, B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) Specification Type 1, prI-ETS 300353, December 1994 18.ETSI, Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic Frame Structures for the Transport of Various Signals (including ATM cells) at the CCITT Recommendation. G.702 Hierarchical Rates of 2048-kbit/s, 34368-kbit/s and 139264-kbit/s; prETS 300337, February 1993 19.IEEE Std 1149.1-1990, IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture 20.Infineon, Data sheet: Frame and Line Interface Component (FALC), PEB 2254 21.Infineon, Prelininary Product Overview: Smart Integrated Digital Echo Canceller (SIDEC), PEB 20954 Data Sheet 288 2003-01-20 IWE8, V3.4 PXB 4219E, PXB 4220E, PXB 4221E Bibliography 22.ITU-T, Recommendation G.131, Control of talker echo, revised 1996 23.ITU-T, Recommendation G.703, Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces, Geneva 1991 24.ITU-T, Recommendation G.704, Synchronous Frame Structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8488 and 44736 kbit/s Hierarchical Levels, 07/95 25.ITU-T, Recommendation G.775, Loss of Signal and Alarm Indication Signal Defect Detection Criteria for Equipment Interfaces described in Recommendation G.703 and Operating at Bit Rates described in Recommendation G.702, COM 15-R 9-E, October 1993 26.ITU-T, Recommendation G.804, "ATM Cell Mapping into Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH)", February 1998 27.ITU-T, Recommendation G.823, The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on the 2048-kbit/s Hierarchy, March 1993 28.ITU-T, Recommendation G.824, The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on the 1544-kbit/s Hierarchy, March 1993 29.ITU-T Recommendation I.231.10, "Circuit-mode Multiple-rate Unrestricted 8 kHz Structured Bearer Service Category" 30.ITU-T, Recommendation I.361, B-ISDN ATM Layer Specification, 11/95 31.ITU-T, Draft Recommendation I.363.1, B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer specification: Type 1 AAL, 08/96 32.ITU-T Recommendation I.432 "B-ISDN user-network interface - Physical layer specification", March, 1993 33.ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1 "B-ISDN user-network interface - Physical layer specification: General characteristics", August, 1996 34.ITU-T Recommendation I.432.3 "B-ISDN user-network interface - Physical layer specification: 1544 kbit/s and 2048 kbit/s operation", August, 1996 Data Sheet 289 2003-01-20 http://www.infineon.com Published by Infineon Technologies AG